Accellos - Guide - Handheld - Manual PDF

Accellos One Warehouse
Powered by RADIO BEACON
Handheld Functions
Accellos Inc.
125 Commerce Valley Drive West, Suite 700
Markham, Ontario, Canada
L3T 7W4
Copyright Accellos, Inc.

All rights reserved
This manual is reserved for licensed users of Accellos One Warehouse. If you are not a licensed user of
Accellos One Warehouse, no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted in any form or by any means electronic, mechanical, recording or otherwise, without the
prior written consent of Accellos, Inc.
The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without
notice and should not be construed as a commitment of Accellos, Inc. Accellos, Inc. assumes no respon-
sibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual.
U SI N G R AD I O B E A C O N H A N D H E L D F U NC T I O N S
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
About Optional Software Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Getting Additional Information and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Total Support Web Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Contacting Radio Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
CHAPTER 1
USING THE HANDHELD INTERFACE
Starting RADIO BEACON WMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Navigating Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Scanning Barcodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Selecting Options from Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Using Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Using Function Keys on the Web Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Accepting Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Identifying Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Handling Products with Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Canceling Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Exiting RADIO BEACON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
I I I
U SI NG R AD I O B E A C O N H A N D H E L D F U NC T I O N S
CHAPTER 2
RECEIVING INVENTORY
Understanding Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Receiving Products with Purchase Orders/Manifests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Receiving Products without Purchase Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Receiving By Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Starting a Wave of Purchase Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Stopping and Restarting a PO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Stopping and Restarting a Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Selecting Products in the Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Random Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Checking-in Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Receiving without a Purchase Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Putting Away Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Bin Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Closing a Purchase Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Quick Container Receiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Completing the Quick Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Handing Incomplete Quick Receiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Receiving By ASN Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Completing the ASN Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Creating Transfer Purchase Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
CHAPTER 3
MOVING/PUTTING AWAY INVENTORY
Understanding Moving and Putaway Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Looking Up Bin Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Moving Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Moving Products Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Moving Products In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Moving Products in One Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Reserving and Unreserving Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Reserving Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Unreserving Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Restocking Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
I V
Finding Homes for Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Selecting a Current Home. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Finding an Empty Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Moving Serialized Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
CHAPTER 4
REPLENISHING PICK BINS
Understanding Replenishment Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Creating Replenishment Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Letting Down Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Letting Down Stock by Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Letting Down Stock by Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Letting Down Stock by Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Letting Down Stock by Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Letting Down Stock by Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Filling Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Selecting the Product to Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Selecting the Bins to Fill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
CHAPTER 5
KITTING AND PACKAGING
About the Kitting and Packaging Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Understanding the Kitting Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Accessing the Kitting/Packaging Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Pulling Kits/Packaging Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Finishing Kits/Packaging Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Picking Build-to-Order Kits into Shipping Cartons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Entering Work Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Disassembling Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
CHAPTER 6
PICKING AND PACKING ORDERS
About Picking and Packing Sales Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Understanding Picking and Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Understanding Picking Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
V
Starting a Wave of Sales Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Selecting a Picking Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Starting a Dispatcher- or System-Waved Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Creating a Wave from the Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Picking Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Understanding and Selecting Picking Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Picking Orders by Wave (Regular Picking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Picking Orders by Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Picking Orders by Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Picking Orders by Scanning Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Picking Orders in One Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Handling Picks You Cannot Fulfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Skipping a Pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Shorting a Pick. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Unpicking an Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Entering Sales Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Creating a Sales Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Adding Lines to a Sales Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Completing a Sales Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Editing a Line Item in a Sales Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Deleting a Line Item in a Sales Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
CHAPTER 7
REPACKING ORDERS
Understanding Repacking Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Repacking Entire Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Repacking Cartons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Stopping and Restarting Repacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Repacking Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Combining Cartons in an Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Relabeling Cartons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Changing a Carton Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Marking a Carton As Repacked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
V I
CHAPTER 8
SHIPPING ORDERS
Understanding Shipping Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Processing Shipping Cartons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Handling Shipping Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Re-rating Cartons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Recording Shipment Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Capturing Additional Barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Adding Cartons to Pallets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Marking External Processes Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
CHAPTER 9
PRINTING LABELS
Understanding Label Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Understanding Printer Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
About the Print Labels Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Redirecting Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Printing Bin Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Printing Product Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Printing Product (Unit) Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Printing Overstock (Case) Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Printing SCC-14 Barcode Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Printing License Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Reprinting ASN SSCC-18 Format Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Reprinting Picking/Shipping Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Reprinting Paper Packslips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Printing Shipping Carton Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Printing Single Carton Contents Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Printing Numbered Carton Contents Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Printing Summary Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Printing Placard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
V I I
CHAPTER 10
COUNTING INVENTORY
Understanding Inventory Counting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Performing a Cycle Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Cycle Counting by Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Cycle Counting by Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Cycle Counting by Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Performing a Full Stock Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Performing the First Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Performing a Recount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Counting Products in a Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Counting by Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Counting by Each . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Completing a Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Stopping and Restarting a Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Stopping a Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Restarting a Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
CHAPTER 11
ADJUSTING INVENTORY
Understanding Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Adjustments to License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Using Miscellaneous Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Creating an Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Adjusting Product Into the Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Adjusting Product Out of the Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Adjusting License Plates Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
CHAPTER 12
WAREHOUSE AND PRODUCT MAINTENANCE
Adding New Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Displaying Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
V I I I
Setting or Modifying Product Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Setting or Modifying a Products UPC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Enabling or Disabling Attribute Tracking for a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Setting or Modifying a Products Product Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Enabling or Disabling Expiry-Date Tracking for a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Setting or Modifying a Products Packsizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Setting or Modifying a Products Bin Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Deleting Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Setting or Modifying Product Packsizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Setting, Modifying, or Deleting Product Cross-References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Deleting a Product Cross-Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Setting or Modifying Replenishment Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Setting Minimum Replenishment Levels for a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Setting Maximum Replenishment Levels for a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Setting or Modifying Sticky Homes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Assigning a Product to a Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Unassigning a Product from a Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Setting or Modifying Replenishment Levels for a Specific Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
CHAPTER 13
USING LICENSE PLATES
Understanding License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
License Plate Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
License Plate Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Creating License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Adding Products to License Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Removing Products From License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Deleting License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Moving License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Picking an Order Using License Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
I X
X
USING RADIO BEACON HANDHELD FUNCTIONS
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
This manual provides conceptual information and step-by-step operational procedures for the
RADIO BEACON WMS RF handheld or PC Telnet application. It is highly recommended that
you read the introductory companion manual, Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS before
working with the procedures contained in this manual.
AUDIENCE
This document is intended for the following readers:
Warehouse staff, who use the RADIO BEACON WMS handheld application for daily
warehouse operations.
Warehouse supervisors or managers, who need to understand handheld functions for the
purposes of administering the warehouse and processing orders through RADIO BEACON
WMS Web Dispatch, or for training handheld users on warehouse-specific procedures.
Radio Beacon Inc. partners and resellers, and warehouse system administrators or IT
managers, who need to understand RADIO BEACON WMS functions for the purposes of
system installation, setup, and ongoing configuration.
This manual assumes some familiarity with basic warehousing concepts, but not necessarily
with concepts or terminology that are specific to warehouse management systems (WMS) or to
RADIO BEACON WMS.
X I
ABOUT OPTIONAL SOFTWARE MODULES

RADIO BEACON WMS is shipped and licensed as a modular product. This means that the
version of RADIO BEACON WMS that you are using may not include all of the features
described in this document. The RADIO BEACON WMS documentation set is based on the core
modules, plus the Order Management and Web Dispatch modules. Wherever optional features
are discussed that are not included in the core, Order Management, or Web Dispatch modules
of RADIO BEACON WMS, an icon indicates the relevant module which you must purchase to be
able to use this feature. If your system does not include that module, you can easily skip over
the material that does not apply to your implementation. The following table lists the optional
modules that are documented, and the icons that represent each module.
Icon Module
Multi-Location/Site Transfer
LOC
Multi-Zone
ZONE
Multi-Company/Third-Party Logistics
3PL
Lots/Serials/Expiry
ATT
Kitting
KIT
Packaging
PACK
Container Receiving
RECV
X I I A B O U T T H I S D O C U M E N T
Icon Module
Putaway/Slotting/Cube/Weight
PUT
Advance/Min-Max Replenishment
REPLEN
Web Order Entry

O/E
Integrated Shipping/End-of-Line Settings

SHIP
Returned Materials Authorizations

RMA
Demand Forecasting
FCAST
Vendor Portal and Cross Docking

VPCD
RFID
RFID
Carousel/Conveyor
CA/CO
Note: Operations pertaining to the Carousels/Conveyors, and the RFID module are not
documented in this manual, as they involve special hardware consideration. The
cross-docking handheld functions are also not described in this manual, as they are
documented as part of the complete cross-docking procedure and involve an
understanding of the complete process.
X I I I
PURPOSE
Since it is assumed that readers will have undergone a minimum of on-site training with RADIO
BEACON WMS, the material in this manual should serve to reinforce and refresh the knowledge
gained from the training courses. Wherever relevant, the manual describes and compares
several ways of accomplishing similar or related tasks, and explains the reasons or contexts for
which you might use one function rather than another.
Because every warehouse implementation is different, it is impossible to document all possible

functions and configurations of RADIO BEACON WMS. Therefore, this document covers the
basic, core features which are used by the majority of warehouses and are considered generic.
Furthermore, to illustrate handheld functions, the document uses a basic data set and the
configuration similar to that which ships with the product by default. In a real-life
implementation, however, it is likely that you will not be using some features that are described
in the manual, and that you may even be using additional, customized features that are not
described in the manual.
Wherever possible, the text indicates where an alternate configuration may result in different
prompts or steps; however, to avoid overly interrupting the flow of procedures, we have not
documented every possible path or outcome for a given function. The exact steps, screens, and
prompts that will appear in your implementation are likely to differ from those depicted in this
manual. It is hoped that you will be able to adapt the procedures to your particular context, and
to develop quick reference cards that provide step-by-step instructions for your exact
configuration and data set.
X I V A B O U T T H I S D O C U M E N T
GETTING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND

SUPPORT
The following manuals contain additional information about RADIO BEACON components:
Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS
Using RADIO BEACON Web Dispatch
TOTAL SUPPORT WEB SITE
You can find additional documentation on the Radio Beacon Total Support Web site,
http://002.radiobeacon.com. This site is updated regularly with supplementary detailed
information on specific topics and common issues.
CONTACTING RADIO BEACON
You can contact Radio Beacon Inc. Customer Support by telephone, fax, or e-mail. Be sure to
have ready your company name, the version of RADIO BEACON WMS you are using and a
concise description of the problem you are experiencing.
Radio Beacon Support
Telephone: 1-(800) 247-9526 Ext. 2
Fax: (416) 486-2169
E-mail: support@radiobeacon.com
X V
DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS
The following formatting conventions are used throughout this document:
Convention Explanation
Initial Caps Indicates the name of a RADIO BEACON WMS function.
Example:
The cartons are sent to the shipping area and, optionally, weighed and
scanned with the Carton Shipping function.
ALL CAPS Indicates a RADIO BEACON WMS system name, such as a bin location or
an order or carton status.
Example:
The order is in the status of SUSPENDED and cannot be processed further
until it is released.
SMALL CAPS Indicates the name of a key you must press.
Example:
To go up a level or exit a function, press ENTER, or [F1], if available.
square brackets Indicates that you must press a key or combination of keys on the
([ ]) handheld. Because different handheld devices have different keypads, the
brackets indicate that you may need to use a different equivalent key or set
of keys on your handheld.
Example:
To go up a level or exit a function, press ENTER, or [F1], if available.
monospace Indicates text that you must enter exactly as shown.
text
Example:
Enter localhost if you are running Telnet on the server machine.
X V I A B O U T T H I S D O C U M E N T
Convention Explanation
bold Indicates text that appears on the screen.
monospace
Example:
text
From the Overstock menu, press the number corresponding to Fill
Bins.
italics Indicates a newly introduced term, emphasis, or a manual title.
Example:
It cannot be further processed until the dispatcher unsuspends it.
> Indicates the start of a procedure.
Example:
> To start picking an order:
X V I I
X V I I I A B O U T T H I S D O C U M E N T
1 USING THE HANDHELD

INTERFACE
This chapter discusses the following topics that familiarize you with basic handheld
operations:
Starting RADIO BEACON WMS on page 2.
Navigating Menus on page 5.
Scanning Barcodes on page 6.
Selecting Options from Lists on page 7.
Using Function Keys on page 8.
Accepting Default Values on page 9.
Identifying Products on page 10.
Handling Products with Attributes on page 12.
Canceling Actions on page 14.
Exiting RADIO BEACON on page 14.
1
STARTING RADIO BEACON WMS

You can access RADIO BEACON handheld functions from a handheld device, from a web
browser using the RADIO BEACON Web Workstation, or from a PC running a Telnet client
application.
To log on to RADIO BEACON:
1. Do one of the following:
If you are using an RF If you are using the Web If you are using a Telnet
handheld terminal, start Workstation, first ensure client program on a PC,
your handheld. that the RFBase Console enter the IP address or
is running. If not, click the machine name of the
RFBASE Handheld icon server on which the
on the desktop or select handheld thread is
RFBASE Handheld the running, or enter
Radio Beacon program localhost if you are
group on the Windows running Telnet on the
Start menu. server machine.
Enter the following in the

address bar of Internet
Explorer.
http://<computer>:81
Where <computer> is the

IP address or machine
name of the server on
which the handheld thread
is running, or localhost
if you are running the Web
Workstation on the RADIO
BEACON server machine.
2 CHAPTER 1 U SI N G T H E H A N D H E L D I N T E R F A C E
The RADIO BEACON WMS logon screen is displayed.
The logon screen for the RF handheld The logon screen for the Web Workstation
appears as follows: appears as follows:
RADIO BEACON
Console Terminal
User ID:
You may select one of the alternate Web

Workstation displays such as 8-carton
Repack Station or Symbol M90.
2. To log on, at the User ID prompt, enter your ID and press ENTER. You are prompted to
enter your password.
User ID: TOM

Password:
3
3. At the Password prompt, enter your password and press ENTER. The main menu appears,
displaying the functions which you have permission to access.
ZZ Limited 1/2
1-Logoff
2-Receiving
3-Overstock
4-Pick + Pack
5-Shipping
6-Cycle Count
7-Label Printing
Logging onto the Web Workstation (or the RFBase Console) also provides the current
status of orders in RADIO BEACON WMS.
NAVIGATING MENUS
Note: The display of menus on the handheld will not necessarily be the same as those
depicted in this manual; the actual menu items you will see are determined by your
configuration, and by your user permissions.
Depending on your user permissions, you may have two main menu screens. If so, you will see
1/2 in the top right corner of the initial menu screen, which means that it is one of two
screens. To alternate between these two screens, press ENTER or [F3] for Next Page.
The number of this

screen.
The Candy Wareho 1/2 The Candy Wareho 2/2
The total number of
1-Logoff 1-Misc Adjusts
screens available for
2-Receiving 2-Warehouse Maint
this menu.
3-Overstock 3-Work Orders
4-Pick + Pack 4-RFID Portal
5-Shipping 5-Add Memo
6-Cycle Count 6-Cross Dock
7-Label Printing
To access any of the sub-menus in a menu, press the number that corresponds to the menu that
you want to open. When you do so, you are presented with a list of functions that make up the
sub-menu. For example, pressing 2 opens the Receiving menu, which displays a list of new
sub-menus, or functions.
RECIVING 1/2
1-Regular Receiving
2-Random Receiving
3-Non-PO Receiving
4-ASN Receiving
5-RMA Receiving
6-Create Transfer PO
7-Container Receiving
5
To go up a level, press [F2] for Up Menu. You can press ENTER to go up a level, if the sub-menu
has only one page, or if you are on the last page of a sub-menu.
From a sub-menu, the navigation function keys are as follows:
F1 Main Menu
F2 Go up one menu level
F3 Go to the next page of items for the current menu
After selecting a function from a menu or sub-menu, to exit the function, press ENTER, or [F1],
if available.
To understand the function keys on the different interfaces, refer to Using Function Keys on
page 8.
SCANNING BARCODES
Many functions require that you enter identification codes for products, bins, shipping cartons,
orders and so on. The easiest way to enter these codes is usually to use the handheld to scan the
barcodes printed in product labels, bin labels, picking/shipping labels, or other documents.
However, in cases where it may be awkward or inconvenient to scan barcodes, you can also
key in equivalent numerical codes, such as product numbers, shipping container numbers,
order numbers, etc. Usually you need to press ENTER after keying in a number in order for
RADIO BEACON WMS to recognize it.
CONTENT LABEL
Entering a number on the keypad
is equivalent to scanning a
Carton: 100000008 barcode.
SELECTING OPTIONS FROM LISTS

In many functions, you are presented with a list of items, such as product numbers, bin
numbers, and so on.
LF408 1/1
Select:
1:A3 6*25
2:C2 8*25
3:B3 5*100
4:C1 2*100
5:REPLENIS 23*100
6:BULK3 2*2500
To select these items, you can do any of the following:
Press the number to the left of the item.
Scan the barcode on the label of the relevant bin, product, or carton.
Key in the (alpha-)numeric identifier of the bin, product or carton, and press ENTER.
If youre using the Web Workstation, you click an item in the list
Again, the presence of the numbers in the top of the screen indicates the total number of
screens that apply to this list of options. Be sure to press ENTER to view other screens before
making a selection. You can usually press [F9] to return to a previous screen.
7
USING FUNCTION KEYS

When asked to use a function key or combination of function keys, you must press the
corresponding function key button(s) on your RF handheld.
DIRECT MOVE
PRODUCT
F3/F4:Pallet In/Out
Some handhelds have function keys labelled F1 through F10, while others use a combination
of keys to enter in the appropriate function. In this manual, brackets ([]) are used to indicate
that you may need to enter a combination of keys to select the equivalent function key.
USING FUNCTION KEYS ON THE WEB WORKSTATION
On the Web Workstation, function keys are displayed as buttons or hyperlinks on the screen.
You can use your mouse to click the function keys to select them.
Example 1: Normal display on the Web Workstation:

Click
Example 2: Symbol M90 display on the Web Workstation
Click
Pressing the function keys on the keyboard will not perform the corresponding handheld
function.
To enter the function from the keyboard, type:
~ (i.e., tilde), then f, then <number>. For example, [F9] is typed ~f9.
ACCEPTING DEFAULT VALUES

In many functions, a default (expected) value is presented in parentheses. When you see this
default, if the value is correct, you can simply press ENTER to accept it, rather than having to
enter the value itself.
BIN: BULK1
Expected: 12
LF409 If this value is correct, simply

Q per P: press ENTER to accept it.
(Default: 2500)
Life Savers PepOMint
9
IDENTIFYING PRODUCTS
When you scan a product barcode, the barcode may contain any of the following information:
the warehouse product number
the vendor part number
the UPC number
the SSCC-14 number
the client number/name
the lot number

ATT
the serial number
other product attributes, such as the size, colour, weight of the product
(For more information on product numbers, please see Product Numbers in the manual
Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS .)
In all handheld functions, when you scan a barcode to identify a product, RADIO BEACON tries
to identify the exact product based on the information provided in the barcode. However, if the
barcode does not contain all the information required to precisely identify the product, there
could be an ambiguity; that is, the same barcode number may apply to multiple products. This
could be the case if:
ATT
Your products use attributes, such as lot numbers.
Your products have other IDs, such as UPC numbers, supplier codes, or barcode cross-
references, and more than one product number is associated with the same barcode.
3PL
Your products are associated with multiple clients.
1 0 CHAPTER 1 U SI N G T H E H A N D H E L D I N T E R F A C E
In these cases, the system will search for all products that match the barcode you scanned, and
if it finds more than one, a screen will appear, prompting you to identify the exact product you
want. Depending on the barcode you have scanned (e.g. a product number, a serial number, a
UPC number, and so on), this screen could show product numbers, product descriptions, client
names, or attribute numbers. For example, if you scan the product number of a product that
belongs to multiple lots, a screen such as the one below will appear, displaying all the lot
numbers found for that product. You would need to select the lot number of the item you are
currently handling.
LF311 1/2
SERIAL #\LOT #
1:\
2:\LOT3495
3:\LOT3857
4:\LOT6938
5:\LOT4847
6:\LOT2736
When you are prompted with such a screen, press the number corresponding to the correct
product and press ENTER, or scan the barcode containing the lot number you are handling.
Note: If you begin to enter the first few digits of the barcode, the system will automatically
fill in the rest.
Or, if you want to get more information, you can toggle between the following screens:
To show a list of product numbers associated with the barcode you scanned, press [F5].
To show a list of product descriptions associated with the barcode you scanned, press [F6].
3PL If your warehouse is a 3PL/multi-company operation, to show a list of client names/

numbers associated with the barcode you scanned, press [F7].
To show a list of attributes associated with the barcode you scanned, press [F8]. Note that
ATT the availability of this option will depend on how your system is configured to track
attributes; for more information, see Handling Products with Attributes on page 12.
1 1
To show a list of the types of identifiers that matched the barcode you scanned (such as
UPC number, vendor part number, barcode cross-reference, or attribute number), press
[F9].
To page up, press [F2].
To shift to the right, press [F9].
HANDLING PRODUCTS WITH ATTRIBUTES

If your warehouse handles products with attributes, such as lot or serial numbers, you will be
ATT prompted to identify the attribute number of the product during various handheld functions.
The functions in which you will be prompted for attribute numbers depend on how your
system is configured to track attributes. For information on the different configurations
possible, see Attribute in the manual Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS .
Note: If your products use more than one attribute, each attribute type may be configured
with a different scenario.
When handling products with non-unique attributes, such as lot numbers, depending on the
functions configured to track attributes in your system, you may be prompted to select from a
list of existing lots, if they have already been recorded in a previous function.
LF311 1/1
SERIAL #\LOT # The first item in this list represents
1:\ the master product, with no
2:\LOT3495 specific lot number.
3:\LOT3857
4:\LOT6938
5:\LOT4847
6:\LOT2736
In all functions except receiving and adjusting product in, you must identify a valid, existing
lot number. When receiving and adjusting product in, you also have the option of adding new
numbers.
In many functions, after selecting the attribute number from a list, you may be required to scan
the barcode containing the attribute again, to confirm the number of the item(s) you are
actually handling. The last lot number that you scanned will usually be displayed. To accept
the displayed attribute number, you can simply press ENTER; otherwise, scan the barcode
number containing the attribute number, or enter the attribute number, and press ENTER.
LF408
If this value is correct, simply
LOT # press ENTER to accept it.
3782
LOT #
By contrast, when handling products with unique attributes, such as serial numbers, you will
usually be required to scan the barcode of each item you are handling. The screen indicates
how many items remain to be scanned.
Item to be scanned.
LF211
2 of 2 Total number of items to be
SERIAL # scanned.
SERIAL #
With the exception receiving, cycle counting, and adjusting product in, the serial numbers you
scan must match existing numbers already recognized by the system.
1 3
CANCELING ACTIONS
In most functions, if you change your mind and want to cancel your previous actions before
you have completed the function, you can press [F1] to exit. (In some cases, you can also use
ENTER to accomplish the same thing.) Any changes you have made will be discarded.
EXITING RADIO BEACON

When you are finished a RADIO BEACON WMS session, you should log off.
> To exit RADIO BEACON:
1. Go to the first screen of the main menu.
2. Press 1 to select Logoff. The logon screen is displayed.
3. To shut down RADIO BEACON WMS from a handheld, turn off your handheld. To shut
down RADIO BEACON WMS on a PC, close your web browser or your Telnet connection.
2 RECEIVING INVENTORY
UNDERSTANDING RECEIVING
RADIO BEACON WMS supports various methods of receiving stock into the warehouse, based
on the way in which the products arrive in the warehouse, such as:
Stock that was ordered on a purchase order, or appears on an incoming manifest or other
documentation. See Receiving Products with Purchase Orders/Manifests on page 15.
Stock that arrives at the warehouse without a purchase order. See Receiving Products
without Purchase Orders on page 17.
Products that are currently in inventory, but arrive at the warehouse from another
warehouse location. For example, transfers from other warehouse sites, or containers that
were checked-in electronically, but not yet physically unloaded. See Creating Transfer
Purchase Orders on page 62.
RECEIVING PRODUCTS WITH PURCHASE ORDERS/MANIFESTS
Purchase orders or manifests may be provided to you in printed form, or may simply exist
electronically in the system. Your warehouse will probably have a procedure for providing you
with the appropriate documentation if required.
1 5
RADIO BEACON WMS supports the following methods of receiving products that are
accompanied by purchase orders or other incoming documents.
By purchase order
This is the regular, or most common way, of receiving. If a shipment arrives with products
sorted by purchase order, you receive the stock according to a PO. Described in
Receiving By Wave on page 18.
By product
This is referred to as random receiving. When products, or groups of products, arrive at

the warehouse, you can receive the products against any open purchase order. This is
called random receiving because the products arrive randomly, rather than being sorted
by purchase order. Described in Random Receiving on page 36.
By container
RECV
For warehouses that normally receive large shipments by container, in which products on
many POs may be mixed, you receive the stock against a container reference number or
manifest. Two container receiving methods are available:
Regular container receivingeach line on the container manifest is checked-in

individually. This method allows the user to verify that the manifest matches the
actual contents of the container. Described in Receiving By Wave on page 18.
Quick container receivingthe entire contents of the container is checked-in at once.

This method an efficient way of receiving stock into the warehouse, based on
purchase orders in a shipment from a trusted source. Described in Quick Container
Receiving on page 55.
By RMA (return materials authorization)

RMA
For warehouses and customers that use RMAs for large volumes of returns, you use the
RMA function to receive this stock. Described in Receiving By Wave on page 18.
1 6 CHAPTER 2 R E C E I V I N G I N V E N T O R Y
By ASN
VPCD Using RADIO BEACONs Vendor Portal, suppliers/vendors create compliant ASN shipping
labels for the cartons they send to your warehouse. You can check-in the entire carton
simply by scanning the track-trace number on the cartons label. Described in Receiving
By ASN Label on page 60.
RECEIVING PRODUCTS WITHOUT PURCHASE ORDERS
For stock that arrives at the warehouse without a purchase order, there are several ways of
handling these:
As unordered items in PO receiving

You may receive unordered items while receiving purchase orders in the normal receiving
process. This option creates and uploads an adjustment for all products that are not on any
PO, and is described in Receiving Unordered Products on page 42.
By non-PO receiving
If your system is configured to allow it, this is a separate receiving function that creates
adjustments which are uploaded to the accounting system. Non-PO receiving can also be
used to assign products to bins during the initial warehouse setup phase. Non-PO
receiving is described in Receiving without a Purchase Order on page 45.
As a miscellaneous adjustment
If your system is configured for non-PO receipts as miscellaneous adjustments, you can
use the Miscellaneous Adjustments function to receive the stock. For procedures, see
Adjusting Inventory on page 325.
Depending on your configuration, during the receiving process, you may also be prompted to
enter or verify information pertaining to the items or orders being received. For PO receipts,
these may include the freight status and cost of the shipment. For all receipts, you may be
prompted to weigh, cube, or enter other information for items received. Note that the
procedures in this chapter do not include these steps.
1 7
RECEIVING BY WAVE
If you receive by purchase order, regular container, or RMA, you receive by wave of purchase
orders. Regardless of whether you are receiving a single purchase order, multiple orders in a
container, or a single RMA receipt, you must start a wave of purchase orders before you start
checking in products. The normal process, then, consists of the following steps:
1. Initiate the receipt, by purchase order, container, or RMA. Procedures for starting a
receiving wave are provided in Starting a Wave of Purchase Orders on page 19.
2. Receive the products, regardless of the method of receiving selected. There are several
ways to identify the products you are receiving. All are described in Selecting Products
in the Wave on page 33.
3. Receive quantities. Products can be received either by units or by case, depending on your
configuration. Receiving quantities is described in Checking-in Products on page 39.
4. Put away products to a temporary or permanent location. Again, there are various methods
from which you can choose to help you determine where to put your received products.
All are described in Putting Away Products on page 48.
5. Repeat the process for all products and orders in the wave.
6. If your warehouse policy requires you to close purchase orders when you are finished
receiving them (rather than having the dispatcher close them), close each purchase order
for which you have received products. Procedures for closing POs are provided in
Closing a Purchase Order on page 54.
If you need to stop or restart a wave, you can do so at any time; follow the procedure in
Stopping and Restarting a PO on page 29 or, for container receiving, Stopping and
Restarting a Container on page 31.
STARTING A WAVE OF PURCHASE ORDERS
To create a wave by purchase order, see Creating a Wave by Purchase Order on page 19.
To start a wave by container, see Starting a Wave by Container on page 23.
To receive by RMA, see Receiving by RMA on page 26.
CREATING A WAVE BY PURCHASE ORDER
In most implementations, PO receiving is the default regular method of receiving. Even if you
are only receiving a single order, you must still create a wave before you can begin receiving
the products on it.
3PL If you are a 3PL or multi-company system, note that you can only receive POs for a single
client at a time.
You can build a wave of purchase orders in two ways:
By scanning each PO.
By selecting from a list of available POs. (Note, however, that if there are many POs in
your database, this method is not recommended, as generating the list of POs may
considerably slow down your system.)
1 9
All methods are included in the following procedure.
> To build a wave of purchase orders:
1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Receiving, and press ENTER.
2. From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to Regular Receiving, and
press ENTER.
3PL 3. If your warehouse supports multiple clients/companies, you are prompted to enter the
client name. Enter the client name/number and press ENTER.
RECV The Wave Information screen is displayed. If container receiving is the default receiving
method, the Container prompt is displayed.
F2-START
Wave Information
Orders: 0
Lines: 0
Units: 0
If necessary, press [F7] to toggle to regular wave receiving.
4. To select a purchase order to add to the wave, do any of the following:

At the F2-Start prompt, scan or enter To select from a list of open purchase
the purchase order number that you want orders, press [F5]. A list of all open POs is
to begin receiving, and press ENTER. displayed.
An asterisk (*) next to a PO number

indicates that this PO has already been
added to a wave, and is in the process of
being received, so you cannot add this PO
to a new wave. (Doing so will result in an
error message.)
Purchase Order 1/1

1: 1193 *
2: 1194 *
3: 1195
4: 1196
Optionally, press ENTER to view additional

screens of purchase orders, and press the
number corresponding to the PO number
you want to select.
The purchase order number, vendor number and name, lines and units for the order are
displayed, and you are prompted to confirm that you want to add this purchase order to
your wave.
CONFIRM (Yes/No)
1193
HER423
HER CANDY MFG
Lines: 1
Units: 10
2 1
5. At the Confirm prompt, enter Y to add this purchase order to the wave, or press N to
reject this order and begin again. If you pressed Y, the Wave Information screen is re-
displayed, now showing the number of purchase orders in the wave (1), and the total
numbers of lines and units in the wave.
F2-START
Wave Information
Orders: 1
Lines: 1
Units: 10
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each purchase order you want to add to your wave. The orders,
lines, and units in the Wave Information are increased for each PO you add to the wave.
7. When you are ready to begin receiving the products in the wave, press [F2].
8. If you are prompted to enter the carrier for the orders, enter the carrier name/number, and
press ENTER.
9. If you are prompted to enter a packslip number for the orders, enter the packslip number
and press ENTER.
A new wave number is created and displayed at the top of the screen. (You can use this
number if you need to stop and restart the wave later; see Stopping and Restarting a PO
on page 29 for more information.)
Wave number
RECEIVE W: 1002
Enter Product #
F2 - Keyword Search
F3 - Recv Labels
F9 - Complete
10. Optionally, do any of the following:
To print product unit or overstock labels To view information for the purchase
for all the products in the wave, press orders in the wave, press [F5]. Vendor and
[F3]. The type of labels printed is buyer information for the first purchase
automatically determined by your order is displayed.
configuration. You can affix the labels
before or during the product receiving Purchase Order
process. 1194
Vendor#:C123
CANDY MANUFACTURER
Buyer:Dale
Enter - Next
F2 - Resume
Press ENTER to view information for the

next purchase order in the wave. When
done, press [F2] to return to the Enter
Product # prompt.
11. To begin receiving products in the wave, follow the procedures in Selecting Products in
the Wave on page 33.
STARTING A WAVE BY CONTAINER
If you are using quick container receiving and you choose not to create a wave, you can follow
the procedure in Quick Container Receiving on page 55.
When you receive by container, your wave has essentially been created for you: the orders are
RECV already grouped into a wave, according to the container reference number. You merely need to
identify this reference number, and the wave is automatically started.
Your warehouse may or may not use container receiving as the default method for wave
receiving.
2 3
> To create a wave by container:
From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to Regular Receiving, and
press ENTER
2. The Wave Information screen is displayed. If container receiving is the default receiving
method in your warehouse, the Container prompt is displayed.
F2-START
Wave Information
Orders: 0
Lines: 0
Units: 0
3. If the Container prompt is not displayed, press [F7] to start container receiving. You are
prompted to enter the container reference number.
F2-START
Wave Information
Orders: 0
Lines: 0
Units: 0
Container:
4. Scan or enter the container number and press ENTER. The total number of orders, lines, and
units in the POs on this container are displayed.
F2-START
Wave Information
Orders: 2
Lines: 3
Units: 38
Container:1000
5. Press [F2] to start receiving.
press ENTER.
and press ENTER.
A new wave number is created and displayed at the top of the screen. (You can use this
Wave number
RECEIVE W: 1002
Enter Product #
F2 - Keyword Search
F3 - Recv Labels
F9 - Complete

for all the products in the wave, press [F3]. orders in the wave, press [F5]. Vendor and
The type of labels printed is automatically buyer information for the first purchase
determined by your configuration. You order is displayed.
can affix the labels before or during the
product receiving process. Purchase Order
1194
Vendor#:C123
CANDY MANUFACTURER
Buyer:Dale
Enter - Next
F2 - Resume

Product # prompt.
9. To begin receiving products, follow the procedures in Selecting Products in the Wave on
page 33, or if you wish to receive the products using quick container receiving, press [F6]
and follow the procedures in Quick Container Receiving on page 55.
2 5
RECEIVING BY RMA
When you receive returned goods via a returned materials authorization (RMA), you also use
RMA regular wave receiving by PO, but you must use the RMA function from the main menu, rather
than the Receiving function. The only difference between regular receiving and RMA
receiving is that during the receipt of products, you are prompted to enter an RMA code after
you have entered the quantity received.
> To receive by RMA:
From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to RMA Receiving, and press
ENTER.
RECV The Wave Information screen is displayed. If container receiving is the default receiving
method, the Container prompt is displayed.
F2-START
Wave Information
Orders: 0
Lines: 0
Units: 0
3. If necessary, press [F7] to toggle to regular wave receiving.
4. Enter or scan the number of the purchase order containing the items being returned. You
are prompted to confirm the addition of this PO to your wave.
CONFIRM (Yes/No)
R000001
RMA RETURNS
Lines: 1
Units: 200
5. At the Confirm prompt, enter Y to add this purchase order to the wave, or press N to
reject this order and begin again. If you pressed Y, the Wave Information screen is re-
displayed, now showing the number of purchase orders in the wave (1), and the total
numbers of lines and units in the wave.
F2-START
Wave Information
Orders: 1
Lines: 1
Units: 200
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each RMA purchase order you want to add to your wave. The
orders, lines, and units in the Wave Information are increased for each PO you add to the
wave.
7. When you are ready to begin receiving the products in the wave, press [F2].
press ENTER.
and press ENTER.
2 7
10. A new wave number is created and displayed at the top of the screen. (You can use this
Wave number
RECEIVE W: 1003
Enter Product #
F2 - Keyword Search
F3 - Recv Labels
F9 - Complete
for all the products in the wave, press orders in the wave, press [F5]. Vendor and
[F3]. The type of labels printed is buyer information for the first purchase
automatically determined by your order is displayed.
configuration. You can affix the labels
before or during the product receiving Purchase Order
process. 1194
Vendor#:C123
CANDY MANUFACTURER
Buyer:Dale
Enter - Next
F2 - Resume

Product # prompt.
12. To begin receiving products in the wave, follow the procedures in Selecting Products in
the Wave on page 33.
STOPPING AND RESTARTING A PO
You can stop and restart a PO or a wave of POs, so that more than one receiver can receive
goods on a single purchase order or wave at any time. To stop a PO, see the procedure in
Stopping a PO below. To restart a PO, see the procedure in Restarting a PO on page 29.
STOPPING A PO
> To stop a PO or wave of POs:
1. At any point during the receiving process, press [F1].
2. From the Enter Product # prompt, press [F1]. You are returned to the main receiving
screen.
RESTARTING A PO
You can restart a wave at any point during the receiving process. However, once a purchase
order is closed and uploaded, it is no longer available in the warehouse, and cannot be
restarted.
There are two ways to restart a receiving wave:
From a list of POs.
By using the Restart function.
Both are described in the following procedure.
2 9
> To restart a PO or wave of POs:
1. From the main receiving screen, do one of the following:

If you have the wave number, or the PO To view a list of open POs, press [F5].
number of one of the orders in the wave, POs that are currently part of a wave (or
from the main receiving screen, press open) have an asterisk (*) next to them:
[F3]. You are prompted to enter the wave
number or a purchase order number Purchase Order 1/1
belonging to the wave that you want to 1: 1193 *
restart. 2: 1194 *
3: 1195
4: 1196
RESTART
Key (or scan)

PO of the wave or wave screens of purchase orders, and press the
number asterisked number corresponding to the
PO number you want to select. You are
warned that the PO is already being
Enter the wave number, or scan or enter received.
the purchase number, and press ENTER.
Purchase Order
1194
Vendor#: C123
CANDY MANUFACTURER
Buyer:Dale
Warning: This PO is
already being received
Press [F3] to restart that wave.
The wave which you have selected, or to which the purchase order you have selected
belongs, is displayed at the top of the screen.
RECEIVE W: 1001
Enter Product #
F2 - Keyword Search
F3 - Recv Labels
F9 - Complete
2. To begin receiving products for the wave, press [F2], and see the procedures in Selecting
Products in the Wave on page 33.
STOPPING AND RESTARTING A CONTAINER
You can stop and restart a container, so that more than one receiver can receive goods in a
RECV single container at any time. You can stop receiving a container by pressing [F1] at any point
during the receiving process.
You can restart a container at any point during the receiving process. However, once the
purchase orders on a container have been closed and uploaded, the container is no longer
available in RADIO BEACON WMS, and cannot be restarted.
> To restart a container:
1. In the main receiving screen, if the Container prompt is not displayed, press [F7] to start
container receiving. You are prompted to enter the container reference number.
F2-START
Wave Information
Orders: 0
Lines: 0
Units: 0
Container:
3 1
2. Scan or enter the container number and press ENTER. A warning message appears.
WARNING:SOME PO
ON THE CONTAINER
ALREADY WAVED
OR RECEIVED!
CONTINUE (Yes/No)?
3. Press Y to restart that container, or N to cancel. The Wave Information screen is displayed,
showing the total number of POs, lines, and units in the container.
F2-START
Wave Information
Orders: 2
Lines: 3
Units: 38
Container:1000
RESTARTING
4. To begin receiving products for the container, press [F2], and see the procedures in
Selecting Products in the Wave on page 33.
SELECTING PRODUCTS IN THE WAVE
Once you have started your wave, you begin selecting the products to receive. Products are
then received into the warehouse as described in Checking-in Products on page 39 and later,
you put the product away to a temporary or permanent storage bin, as described in Putting
Away Products on page 48.
There are three ways to select a product to be received:
By selecting it from a list.
By searching for it by keyword.
By scanning the product.
Each method is described in the following procedure.
If you need to correct the quantity, packsize, or other information for an item you have
received, follow the procedure in Correcting a Receipt on page 44. If unordered products
arrive with a shipment, and you are allowed to receive these into the warehouse, follow the
procedure in Receiving Unordered Products on page 42.
Finally, your warehouse will have a policy for handling short- or over-shipped quantities, and
your system will be configured to use codes to handle these appropriately. In the procedures in
this chapter, receivers are allowed to receive both short-shipped and over-shipped items, and
all default receiving codes are used.
> To select products to be received:
1. Create a wave of purchase orders, by following any of the procedures in Starting a Wave
of Purchase Orders on page 19.
3 3
2. At the Enter Product # prompt, do one of the following:
Select a product from one To display a list from To search for products by
of the cartons and scan the which you can select keyword, press [F2]. You
products barcode label, or products, press ENTER. A are prompted to enter a
enter its product number list is displayed of all keyword.
and press ENTER. If you products available to be
scan an unrecognized received in the wave, by RECEIVE
barcode, you are prompted product description. Enter Keyword
to create a product cross-
reference. To create a Receive 1/1
cross-reference, enter Y, Select Item
and at the Product 1:DoubleMint Gum
2:TicTac Freshmint
prompt, enter an existing 3:Big Red
product number; 4:Breath Savers Spear
otherwise, enter N and re- 5:Spearmint Gum Enter part of the products
scan the barcode or enter 6:Juicy Fruit description or a couple of
the product number. letters that may be
Optionally, press [F4] to included in the product
display products by you want to search for.
product number. Press The system displays each
[F4] to toggle back to instance found on a PO
display products by that matches your search.
description. In the example below, the
word Gum was entered,
Receive 1/1 and the following results
Select Item are displayed:
1:LF312
2:LF408
3:LF522 Keyword 1/1
Select Item
4:LF551
1:Doublemint Gum
5:LF211
6:LF311 2:Spearmint Gum
3:Doublemint Gum
If necessary, press ENTER

to view additional screens
of products, and press the
number corresponding to
the product you want to
receive first. If your
product appears on more Press the number

than one PO, a list of these corresponding to the
is displayed. product which you want to
receive.
RECEIVE 1/1
Purchase Order
1:1194
2:1195
If necessary, press ENTER

to view additional screens
of POs, and press the
number corresponding to
the PO against which you
want to receive your
selected product. In this
situation, you may need to
refer to the paperwork to
determine the correct PO.
If any special instructions have been defined for the product, they are displayed. Press
ENTER to continue.
3. If you are prompted to enter an expiry date for the product, enter it in the required format,
and press ENTER.
4. To receive the products into the warehouse, see Checking-in Products on page 39.
3 5
RANDOM RECEIVING
When products arrive at the warehouse, those products may not be sorted by purchase order.
Rather than have the warehouse staff sort the products, it may be easier to receive a product
and let RADIO BEACON WMS find a purchase order on which the product is included. This is
referred to as random receiving because the products arrive randomly, rather than being
sorted by purchase order. The random receiving procedure consists of the following steps:
1. Initiate the receipt by selecting a product. RADIO BEACON WMS finds open purchase
order(s) on which the product is includes. The products can be received against any open
PO.
2. Once a PO is selected for the product, you continue using the receive by purchase order
method of receiving, as described in steps 3 to 6, below.
3. Receive quantities. Products can be received either by units or by case, depending on your
configuration. Receiving quantities is described in Checking-in Products on page 39.
4. Put away products to a temporary or permanent location.There are various methods from
which you can choose to help you determine where to put your received products. All are
described in Putting Away Products on page 48.
5. Repeat the process for all products on the purchase order.
6. If your warehouse policy requires you to close purchase orders when you are finished
receiving them (rather than having the dispatcher close them), close the purchase order for
which you have received products. Procedures for closing POs are provided in Closing a
Purchase Order on page 54.
If you need to stop or restart a purchase order, you can do so at any time; follow the procedure
in Stopping and Restarting a PO on page 29.
> To random receive:
From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to Random Receiving, and
press ENTER.You are prompted for a product.
RECEIVE
Enter Product #
F2: Keyword Search
F9: Complete
2. At the Enter Product # prompt, do one of the following:

Scan the products barcode label, or enter its To search for products by keyword, press
product number and press ENTER. [F2]. You are prompted to enter a keyword.
RECEIVE
Enter Keyword
Enter part of the products description or a

couple of letters that may be included in the
product you want to search for. The system
displays each instance found on a PO that
matches your search. In the example below,
the word Gum was entered, and the
following results are displayed:
Keyword 1/1
Select Item
1:Doublemint Gum
2:Spearmint Gum
3:Doublemint Gum
Press the number corresponding to the

product which you want to receive.
3 7
3. If the product is included on more than one purchase order, those purchase orders are
listed on the screen.
RECEIVE
Purchase Order
1:1000193 Spearmint
2:1000198 Spearmint
3:1000283 Spearmint
4:1000286 Spearmint
4:1000288 Spearmint
4:1000300 Spearmint
4. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of purchase orders. Press the number
corresponding to the PO number you want to select.
The product name, quantity ordered, and quantity received (0 to start) are displayed. If
you are receiving by case, the default receiving packsize is also displayed. (This is 0 if
none has been defined) .
LF211
Spearmint Gum
O 48 R 0
Q per P:
(Default: 12)
5. Continue checking-in and putting-away the product as described in Checking-in

Products on page 39 and Putting Away Products on page 48.
6. When the product is put away, you will be prompted for the next product in purchase
order. Continue checking-in and putting-away until all products in the purchase order are
finished.
7. Complete the purchase order according to the policy in your warehouse, as described in
Closing a Purchase Order on page 54.
CHECKING-IN PRODUCTS
Once you select the product to receive (and any applicable purchase order information in
random receiving), you can begin checking them into the warehouse. When you finish
receiving a product, you put the product away to a temporary or permanent storage bin, as
described in Putting Away Products on page 48.
Your system will be configured to receive by case or by unit. Although the configuration used
in this manual is to receive by case, both processes are described.
> To receive products into the warehouse:
1. Select products to receive as described in Selecting Products in the Wave on page 33 or

as described in Random Receiving on page 36.
2. For the first product selected, the product name, quantity ordered, and quantity received (0
to start) are displayed. If you are receiving by case, the default receiving packsize is also
displayed. (This is 0 if none has been defined; for information on setting these, see
Setting or Modifying Product Packsizes on page 358.)
Total quantity ordered for
LF211 this wave (wave receiving)
Spearmint Gum or PO (random receiving).
Quantity received so far.
O 10000 R 0
Q per P: Default receiving packsize
(Default: 2500) (for case receiving).
3. If you are receiving by case, at the Q per P prompt, enter the packsize in which the
product has arrived, or press ENTER to accept the default.
Note: If you plan to move product immediately to pick bins, rather than storing it in
overstock bins, be sure to enter a packsize that can be accepted into pick bins.
3 9
The number of cases or units expected in the wave (wave receiving) or PO (random
receiving) is displayed.
LF211
Spearmint Gum
O 10000 R 0 Total number of packs or units

Q per P:2500 expected in this wave (wave
#Packs: receiving) or PO (random
(Default: 4) receiving).
4. Count the number of cases or units that have actually arrived, enter the quantity received,
and press ENTER.
ATT 5. If you are prompted for a non-unique attribute, such as a lot number, scan the barcode
containing the attribute number, or enter the number and press ENTER.
6. If you are prompted to print labels, do one of the following:

Enter the number of Press [F8] to print product Press ENTER to skip
overstock labels you labels. When prompted for printing labels.
would like to print, and the SKU#, if you want to
press ENTER. print the customers
product number on this
label, enter the number
and press ENTER;
otherwise, press ENTER to
leave this field blank. If
you are prompted to enter
a packsize and/or a
number of packs (for
packaged/bagged goods),
enter the desired values at
the prompts and press
ENTER each time. When
prompted for the number
of labels, enter the
quantity of labels you
want, and press ENTER.
7. If you entered more than was expected, and you are prompted to accept the quantity, press
Y to receive the over-shipped item, or N to cancel it.
If you entered less than was expected, when prompted to enter a completion code, enter
one of the following defaults (your warehouse may not use all of them), or press ENTER if
you are unsure whether there is more product to be received.
Code Use to...
S or Y Confirm that the quantity you entered is correct, but mark the
shipment complete anyway.
N Cancel the quantity you entered, and return to the previous screen.
I Confirm that the quantity you entered is correct, but that the product
was shipped short.
B Confirm that the quantity you entered is correct, but that the product
was shipped short, and a back order should be created for this item.
RMA If this is an RMA receipt, you are prompted to enter a status for the returned goods. (Your
choices will be determined by your configuration.)
RMA Code:
1: OK - Good
Condition
2: DS - Damaged
Press the number corresponding to the selection you want, and press ENTER. If you
selected an option that indicates that the product should not be returned to inventory, the
COMPLETED message is displayed at the bottom of the screen for the product; repeat the
procedure for the next product in the wave (wave receiving) or PO (random receiving).
8. You are prompted to enter the bin to which you want to put away the product. Follow the
procedure in Putting Away Products on page 48.
4 1
RECEIVING UNORDERED PRODUCTS
If products have arrived with a shipment, but do not appear on a PO, and you are allowed to
receive them into the warehouse, you can open a miscellaneous adjustment to do so.
> To receive unordered products:
1. At the Enter Product # prompt, press [F7]. You are prompted to identify the unordered
product.
RECEIVE
Ref:1194
PRODUCT
At the Product prompt, scan the products barcode label, or enter the product number
and press ENTER.
If more than one product matches the barcode you scanned, you are prompted to select the
correct product. To select the product, follow any of the steps described in Identifying
Products on page 10.
The adjustment screen is displayed.
RECEIVE
Ref:1194
LF600
Breath Savers Winter
1 - In 2 - Out
2. Press 1 to move this product into the warehouse.
3. Continue by following the procedure in Adjusting Product Into the Warehouse on

page 331.
STOPPING A RECEIPT
When you stop the receipt of a regular product, RADIO BEACON automatically cancels the
received quantity for the item, if you entered it previously, and resets the quantity to 0.
However, when you stop the receipt of a product with unique attributes, such as serial
numbers, RADIO BEACON keeps the quantity of the items you have already scanned.
1. At any point while you are receiving a product, press [F1].
ATT If you pressed [F1] from a screen prompting you for a product attribute, you are prompted
to confirm that you want to stop the wave (wave receiving) or PO (random receiving).
LF211 0
Spearmint Gum
Only 1
of 2400 received OK
to quit (Yes/No)?
2. Press Y and ENTER.
You are returned to the Enter Product # prompt.
4 3
CORRECTING A RECEIPT
If you find that you need to correct the receipt of an item on a PO, you can do so at any time
before the PO has been uploaded.
> To correct the receipt of a product:
1. If necessary, restart the wave containing the PO or the PO you want to correct, by using
any of the methods described in Stopping and Restarting a PO on page 29.
2. At the Enter Product # prompt, scan the barcode label of the product to be modified,
or enter the product number and press ENTER. You are prompted to confirm the correction.
LF551 Total number of packs in the

Breathsavers original order.
Spearmint
Total number of packs already
O 10000 R 10000 received.
ALREADY RECEIVED
MODIFY ?
CONFIRM (Y/N/M)
3. Enter one of the following:
Option Use to...

Y Receive additional quantities of the product. This option maintains the
original quantity received, and adds the new quantity you specify.
Continue by following the steps in Checking-in Products on
page 39.
N Cancel the correction. The original quantity you entered will remain
the same.
M Cancel the original quantity received for this product, and specify a
new quantity. This option zeroes the original quantity received, and
replaces it with the new quantity you specify. Continue by following
the steps in Checking-in Products on page 39.
RECEIVING WITHOUT A PURCHASE ORDER

If your system is configured to allow it, you can use non-PO receiving to receive products that
do not belong to a PO, and create a new PO containing these products. Note, however, that
although you create a purchase order number to identify the receipt in RADIO BEACON WMS,
the data is uploaded to the accounting system as a miscellaneous adjustment; no actual PO is
uploaded.
Non-PO receiving is also used in many warehouses to set up the system initially, by
receiving products to bins. This identifies the bins used in the warehouse to the system, as
well as the products that are contained in them.
> To non-PO receive:
1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Receiving. From the Receiving
menu, press the number corresponding to Non-PO Receiving, and press ENTER.
If your warehouse supports multiple clients/companies, you are prompted to enter the
client name. Do one of the following:
3PL
If you want to receive only the products for a specific client, enter the client name/
number and press ENTER.
If you want to receive products for all clients, simply press ENTER.
2. The Non-PO Receive screen is displayed. You are prompted to create a new purchase
order.
Non-PO RECEIVE
Purchase Order
f1: Exit
4 5
3. Enter a reference number for the new PO and press ENTER.
press ENTER.
and press ENTER.
You are prompted to enter the first product to be received.
Non-PO RECEIVE
Enter Product #
F9: complete
6. Scan the barcode label of the product you are receiving, or enter the product number and
press ENTER. If you scan an unrecognized barcode, you are prompted to create a product
cross-reference. To create a cross-reference, enter Y, and at the Product prompt, enter an
existing product number; otherwise, enter N and re-scan the barcode or enter the product
number.
and press ENTER.
The product name, quantity ordered (normally 0 in a non-PO receipt), and quantity
received are displayed. If your system is configured to receive by case, the default
receiving packsize is also displayed (0 if none has been defined; for information, on
setting these, see Setting or Modifying Product Packsizes on page 358).
LF211 Quantity ordered

Spearmint Gum
Quantity received
Default receiving packsize (if

O 0 R 0
receiving by case)
Q per P:
(Default: 2500)
8. If you are receiving by case, at the Q per P prompt, enter the packsize in which the
product has arrived.
Note: If you plan to move product immediately to pick bins, rather than storing it in
overstock bins, be sure to enter a packsize that can be accepted into pick bins.
Since this product was not on a purchase order, the default number of cases or units is
displayed as 0.
LF211
Spearmint Gum
O 0 R 0
Q per P:2500
#Packs:
(Default: 0)
9. Count the number of cases or units that have actually arrived, enter the quantity received,
and press ENTER.
ATT 10. If you are prompted for a non-unique attribute, such as a lot number, scan the barcode
containing the attribute number, or enter the number and press ENTER.
11. You are prompted to enter the bin to which you want to put away the product. Follow the
procedure in Putting Away Products on page 48.
4 7
PUTTING AWAY PRODUCTS

Once you have received products, you put them away to a temporary or permanent storage bin.
If you are not actually putting the products away physically, you assign them to a temporary
location, such as a receiving or returned materials area. Putaway drivers can then move the
stock with the Direct Move or Restock functions. (For information on these, see Moving/
Putting Away Inventory on page 65.)
For warehouses that use license plates, at this point, when you putaway products in temporary
or permanent bins, you can create new license plates or add the products to existing license
plates. When you are asked to enter a bin into which you receive the product(s), if you enter a
license plate number instead of bin number, the system will recognize these as a license plated
products. Prior to entering a license plate, you can optionally print a license plate label, which
you can then scan as the license plate number at the bin prompt.
> To put away products:
1. After you have received products as described in Checking-in Products on page 39 or in

Receiving without a Purchase Order on page 45, you are prompted to enter the bin to
which you want to put away the product.
LF211
Spearmint Gum
Bin:
To Bin>
#Packs:4 of 2500
2. Optionally, if you were not prompted to print product labels, and would like to do so, do
any of the following
To print overstock labels for the received If you are planning to break open the
cases, press [F4]. When prompted for the cases into units for putaway, and want to
number of overstock labels, enter the print product unit labels, press [F8]. When
quantity, and press ENTER. You are prompted for the SKU#, if you want to
returned to the putaway screen. print the customers product number on
this label, enter the number and press
ENTER; otherwise, press ENTER to leave
this field blank. If you are prompted to
enter a packsize and/or a number of packs
(for packaged/bagged goods), enter the
desired values at the prompts and press
ENTER each time. When prompted for the
number of product labels, enter the
quantity of labels you want, and press
ENTER. You are returned to the putaway
screen.
4 9
3. At the Bin prompt, do one of the following:
If you are putting away the If you are If you want to use license
product to an overstock or PUT receiving by plates, enter a license plate
temporary receiving unit, or have number instead of a bin.
location, or know a valid received
pick bin to which you product in packsizes that Optionally, press [F9] to
want to put away all or may be stored in pick bins, print a license plate label.
some of the received and want to find the most The next sequential
product, go to the bin and suitable bin into which to license plate is printed.
scan its barcode label, or put away the product,
enter the bin number and press [F2] to do a bin Scan or enter the license
press ENTER. If the bin you query and follow any of plate number and press
entered does not exist, and the procedures in Finding ENTER. For an existing
you are prompted to add Homes for Products on license plate, the screen
the bin, press Y to add the page 110. displays the bin associated
bin or N not to add the bin. with the license plate.
If you press N, you are
prompted to enter a new If the license plate you
bin. entered does not exist, you
are prompted to create the
new license plate; Press Y
to add the license plate or
N not to add the license
plate. If you press Y, you
are asked to assign the
license plate to bin. This is
the bin into which you will
put the products. If you
press N, you are prompted
to enter a new bin, to
which you can respond
with a either a bin or
license plate.
Note: Refer to Bin Restrictions on page 53 to understand some of the constraints that may
affect the bin into which you put the product(s) you receive.
You are prompted to enter the number of packs you want to put away to this bin.
LF211
Spearmint Gum
Bin :BULK1
#Packs>
#Packs:4 of 2500
4. At the #Packs prompt, enter the number of packs you want to put away to this bin and
press ENTER. (You do not have to put away all packs to the same bin.) A message is
displayed, indicating that the product has been added to that bin.
LF211
Spearmint Gum
Bin:
To Bin>
#Packs:3 of 2500
MOVED
5. If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for
ATT the attribute number for the first unit, scan the number on the products barcode label or
enter the number and press ENTER. If you are then prompted for additional attribute
numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and press ENTER. Repeat this step for each
unit you are receiving to this bin.
5 1
6. If you did not enter the full quantity of packs received in the first bin, repeat steps 3 to 5
for all remaining packs to be put away. The COMPLETED message is displayed at the
bottom of the screen when all packs are put away.
RECEIVE W: 1001 RECEIVE Non-PO RECEIVE

Enter Product #
Enter Product # Enter Product #
OR OR
F2 - Keyword Search F2 - Keyword Search
F3 - Recv Labels F9: Complete
F9 - Complete F9 - Complete
COMPLETED COMPLETED COMPLETE
7. To continue putting away products until all products are finished:
For purchase order receiving: For non-PO receiving:
Repeat the procedure for each product in the Repeat steps 6 to 11 in Receiving without
wave (wave receiving) or PO (random Purchase Order on page 45 for all product
receiving). When all products have been you want to receive on this PO.
received, a message is displayed at the bottom
of the screen.
RECEIVE W: 1001 RECEIVE
Enter Product # Enter Product #
F2-Keyword Search or F2-Keyword Search

F3-Recv Labels
F9-Complete F9-Complete
NONE LEFT NONE LEFT
Note: If you are receiving by

RECV container, the message None left
in cont is displayed. This does not
mean that the purchase order is
complete, however, as remaining lines on the
PO could be arriving via another container.
If the policy in your warehouse is for the If the policy in your warehouse is to allow
dispatcher to close all POs in a batch at the you to close POs individually at receiving,
end of the day, so that you do not need to follow the procedure in Closing a
close the PO, press [F1] or ENTER to exit Purchase Order on page 54.
the receiving function.
BIN RESTRICTIONS
Pick bins have restrictions on the products you can put into them, based on their type. For
example, you cannot put two different products into a dedicated pick bin. For warehouses that
use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation, these conditions impose
additional restrictions on the products you can put into them. For example, if your warehouse
stores products using single homes, you cannot put a product into a bin if it is already stored in
another pick bin.
For warehouses that use license plates, there are additional restrictions to consider when
creating a new license plates, or adding products to existing license plates. There are license
plate-specific rules that are applied to bins; for example, some bins may not be configured to
keep license plate information (i.e., the bin is configured to kill license plates). There are also
rules for acceptable product mixing within a bin and/or a license plate; for example, a product
cannot exist in two different packsizes in a single license plate. Furthermore, a bin may not
hold a product & packsize in both license plate and free (non-licence plate) formats at the
same time.
5 3
CLOSING A PURCHASE ORDER

Closing a purchase order uploads a receipt confirmation to the accounting system, and makes
it unavailable for further processing in RADIO BEACON WMS.
You can close a purchase order at any time, whether or not you have received all items on it.
Note, however, that if you close a purchase order before all items are received, the purchase
order is marked as shipped complete, and you will not be able to access it again.
RECV Note: If you are receiving by container, be aware that the container may only arrive with
some of the lines of the purchase orders on it. Be careful not to close purchase orders
on containers until you are sure that all lines have been received.
> To close a purchase order:
1. At the Enter Product # prompt, press [F9] to close the purchase order against which
you were receiving products. If you have missed any items, you are prompted to confirm
the closure.
RECEIVE W: 1001 RECEIVE
Some items have not OR Some items have not

been recvd been recvd
F2 - Resume F2 - Resume
F9 - Complete F9 - Complete

To continue receiving remaining products If all the products have been received, or
for this purchase order, press [F2]. You are to close the PO without the missing items,
returned to the Enter Product # press [F9].
prompt.
One of the following messages is displayed:
For purchase order receiving, the message For non-PO receiving, the message indicates
indicates that receipt confirmation will be that the receipt is complete.
uploaded to the accounting system, and
purchase order information is displayed.
RECEIVE W: 1001 RECEIVE NON-PO RECEIVE

CANDY CO CANDY CO
Vendor#: C123 or Vendor#: C123
Purchase Order Purchase Order
1194 1194
Dale Dale
COMPLETED COMPLETED COMPLETED
3. Press ENTER to return to the receiving screen. Repeat the procedure for all products you
need to receive.
4. Press [F1] to return to the main Receiving menu.
QUICK CONTAINER RECEIVING

RECV Quick container receiving lets the receiver check in an entire container or purchase order with
one scan, rather than going through all the products in the shipment. However, this method of
receiving requires a high level of confidence that the expected product and quantity matches
the stock that is actually delivered. Using quick container receiving, all products in the
container or purchase order are received to the same bin.
Quick Container receiving is also an effective way of license plating all the products in a
container or purchase order at one time to a single license plate.
5 5
If you need to receive items in the container to different license plates or bins, or if you would
like to verify individual items in the container or purchase order later, you can do one of the
following:
Do a quick container receive to a license plate assigned to a temporary bin location and
later direct move the license plate to the permanent location as described in Moving
Inventory on page 69.
Do a quick container receive to a temporary location and later direct move products into
their respective license plates.
Do a quick container receive to a license plate and later move products out of the license
plate to different licence plates, as required.
Do a quick container receive to a license plate and later, the license-plated shipment can
undergo detailed receiving in the warehouse, by creating a transfer purchase order, as
described in Creating Transfer Purchase Orders on page 62. If extra items are in the
shipment, they can be received using non-PO receiving; missing items can be adjusted out
of inventory, as described in Adjusting Product Out of the Warehouse on page 334.
> To quick container receive:
From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to Quick Container, and
press ENTER.
The Quick Receive screen with the CONTAINER prompt is displayed.
QUICK RECEIVE
CONTAINER
2. At the Container prompt, scan or enter either a container reference number or a

purchase order number and press ENTER. Details of the container/purchase order are
displayed.
QUICK RECEIVE
CNTR005
TO BIN:
144 Items in
9 Lines
3. Optionally, press [F2] to view the items in the container/purchase order. Each line in the
container/purchase order is displayed and shows the product, quantity and packsize
ordered. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of lines in the container/
purchase order. To return to the Quick Receive screen, press ENTER.
CBTR005 1/2
1: LF407 2.00*6
2: LF409 1.00*3
3: LF522 3.00*6
4: LF311 1.00*6
5: LF211 5.00*12
6: LF600 5.00*1
5 7
4. At the on the TO BIN prompt, on the Quick Receive screen, do one of the following:
If you are putting away all the products in To add all the products in the container or
the container or the purchase order to an the purchase order to a license plate, scan
overstock or temporary receiving location, or enter the license plate number and press
or if you know a valid pick bin to which ENTER. For an existing license plate, the
you want to put away all the products, go screen displays the bin associated with the
to the bin and scan its barcode label, or license plate.
enter the bin number and press ENTER. If
the bin you entered does not exist, and you If the license plate you, entered does not
are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add exist, you are prompted to create the new
the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press license plate; press Y to add the license
N, you are prompted to enter a new bin. plate or N not to add the license plate. If
you press Y, you are asked to assign the
license plate to bin. This is the bin into
which you will put the products. If you
press N, you are prompted to enter a new
bin, to which you can respond with a
either a bin or license plate.
5. When you enter a valid putaway bin, the following message is displayed:
QUICK RECEIVE
CONTAINER
SUCCEED!
The quick container receive function receives every open line in the container. It does not
process lines marked with S (complete) or B (received short, but requiring back ordering
of the missing items). The received quantity is 100% and the packsize is the packsize of
the ordered goods.
6. To quick receive another container, repeat steps 2 to 5.
7. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Receiving menu.
COMPLETING THE QUICK RECEIVE
When quick container receiving is successful, the purchase order(s) used to create the
container are closed only if every line in the purchase order is completed. When all the lines in
the purchase order(s) that have been successfully received, the purchase order will be ready to
upload to the host, or automatically uploaded depending on your configuration.
HANDING INCOMPLETE QUICK RECEIVING
The following describes the circumstances in which a purchase order(s) will not be completed,
and how they can be closed.
Purchase Order is not completed if... Can be completed by...

A line in the purchase order has ben marked B Using the F9 Complete function on the
(received short, but requiring back ordering of handheld as described in Closing a
the missing items) Purchase Order on page 54, or by the
dispatcher from Web Dispatch, depending
on the policy in your warehouse.
If the container contains a purchase order(s) Receiving the containers in which there are
which overlaps other containers, which have open lines from the purchase order.
not yet been received
5 9
RECEIVING BY ASN LABEL

ASN receiving requires SSCC-18 shipping labels created using the RADIO BEACON Vendor
VPCD Portal. The receiver checks-in the carton simply by scanning the track-trace number. Since
these are labels created by the Vendor Portal, RADIO BEACON WMS can identify the all the
information about the contents of the carton from the track-trace number. Depending on your
system configuration, the track-trace number may be captured as the license plate for the
contents of the carton during check-in.
> To ASN receive:
From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to ASN Receiving, and press
ENTER.
The ASN Receive screen with the ASN Label prompt is displayed.
ASN RECEIVE
ASN LABEL:
2. At the ASN Label prompt, scan or enter the track-trace number on the label and press
ENTER. Details of the carton contents are displayed.
ASN RECEIVE
00099999991000000450
TO BIN:
144 Items in
9 Lines
3. Optionally, press [F2] to view the items in the carton. Each line in the carton is displayed
and shows the product, quantity and packsize ordered.
If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of lines in the carton. To return to the
ASN Receive screen, press ENTER.
100000045 1/2
1: LF407 2.00*6
2: LF409 1.00*3
3: LF522 3.00*6
4: LF311 1.00*6
5: LF211 5.00*12
6: LF600 5.00*1
4. At the TO BIN prompt on the ASN Receive screen, go to an overstock, temporary

receiving location, or valid pick bin to which you want to put away all the products. Scan
the barcode label on the bin, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. If the bin you
entered does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not
to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.
5. After you enter a bin, the contents of the carton are added to that bin and depending on
your system configuration, the carton contents are license plated with the track-trace
number.
6. The ASN RECEIVING screen re-displays. Scan the next carton, or press [F1] to return to
the main Receiving menu.
COMPLETING THE ASN RECEIVE
When ASN receive is successful, the purchase order(s) used to create the labels are not closed
even if every line in the purchase order is completed. The purchase order needs to be closed
either in Web Dispatch or on the handheld, depending on the policy of your warehouse.
6 1
CREATING TRANSFER PURCHASE ORDERS

A transfer purchase order is used to receive goods that are already in inventory into the
warehouse. Transfer purchase orders are processed in a similar way to regular purchase orders,
except that the host systems inventory quantities are not increased as a result of receiving the
transfer purchase order. Consider the following examples:
RADIO BEACON WMSs warehouse/site transfer functionality allows the transfer of

LOC products from one warehouse site to another warehouse site. Since the goods are already
in inventory, the warehouse transfer function changes the location of the stock, but not the
quantities of the stock. Transfer purchase orders are used to receive the goods into a
destination warehouse, but the inventory quantities are not increased as a result of
receiving the transfer purchase order. For more information about warehouse/site
transfer, see Warehouse/Site Transfer in Chapter 2, Understanding RADIO BEACON
WMS Processes in the "Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS" manual.
Goods in a container in the yard or on the water, can be a received to a license plate
RECV using quick container receiving or ASN receiving (see Quick Container Receiving on
page 55 and/or Receiving By ASN Label on page 60), perhaps even before they arrive
at the warehouse. This updates the hosts accounting system inventory with the received
VPCD quantities. Then, the receiver can create a transfer purchase order when the goods are
unloaded at the warehouse and the goods could be received a second time (the regular
detail-receiving), to verify the contents of the container. However, when the transfer
purchase is received, the hosts accounting system inventory will not be updated. Any
discrepancies found as result of the detailed check-in can be handled as adjustments. See
Chapter 11, Adjusting Inventory on page 325
Using the Receiving menu on the handheld, the receiver in the warehouse can create a
purchase order from a license plate number. Note that the license plate points to a bin location,
and when you create a transfer PO from a license plate, the transfer purchase order includes all
items in license plates in the location (not just the items in the carton being scanned). For
example, if a bin contains a total of 122 items in 17 license plates, even though you scan only a
single license plate, the purchase order that is created includes all the 122 items. Of course, if
multiple license plates are detected, you will be asked to confirm the create transfer PO
operations.
> To create a transfer purchase order from a license plate number:
From the Receiving menu, press the number corresponding to Create Transfer PO,
and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter a license plate.
CREATE TRANSFER PO
LICENSE PLATE:
2. At the LICENSE PLATE prompt, scan or enter the license plate for which you want to
create a transfer purchase order. The bin associated with the license plate displays. Since
the transfer purchase order will include all items in that bin, the total number of license
plates and items in the bin are displayed. You are asked to confirm your choice.
CREATE TRANSFER PO
BIN: B007
20 Items in
5 license
Create Transfer PO?
Yes/No
3. Press Y to create the transfer PO or N to enter a different license plate. If you press Y, you
are asked to enter a purchase order number.
CREATE TRANSFER PO
BIN: B007
PO:
6 3
4. At the PO prompt, enter a number for the purchase order you are creating. You are
prompted for the destination warehouse.
CREATE TRANSFER PO
BIN: B007
PO:
P00123
TO WAREHOUSE
5. Enter the destination warehouse and press ENTER. If you are creating a transfer PO to detail
receive items already in the warehouse, the destination warehouse can be the current
warehouse. You will receive a message that creation of the Transfer Purchase Order
succeeded.
6. To create another transfer purchase order repeat steps 2 to 5. Otherwise, press [F1] to exit
and you are returned to the Receiving menu.
3 MOVING/PUTTING AWAY
INVENTORY
UNDERSTANDING MOVING AND PUTAWAY

FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes functions you can use in conjunction with receiving or replenishment, to
move inventory within the warehouse. All of these functions do not actually affect the
inventory count in your warehouse, but simply move products from one in-warehouse bin to
another. These functions are also used for managing license plates within the warehouse. Your
system may be configured to upload updated bin locations to the host system; otherwise, the
host system may not be notified when any of these functions are performed.
This chapter describes the following functions:
Looking up the contents of bins. This is a generic function you can use when managing
inventory in the warehouse. It lists the products that are currently stored in a selected bin,
and displays the quantities and statuses of a selected product for all bins in which it is
stored in the warehouse. Described in Looking Up Bin Contents on page 67.
Moving products inside the warehouse. You can use the Direct Move function at any time,
to put away products that have been received from a receiving area to overstock or pick
bins, or simply to relocate stock in different bins in the warehouse, for any purpose.
Described in Moving Inventory on page 69.
6 5
Moving serialized products to a bin using the Move Serial function. The Move Serial
function is a faster and easier way of moving serialized products into a different bin.
Described in Moving Serialized Products on page 115.
Reserving stock to prevent it from being allocated (if you have supervisor permissions
only). You can access the Reserve Stock function from the Direct Move function.
Described in Reserving and Unreserving Inventory on page 101.
Restocking returned products to bins in the warehouse. For warehouses that process large
volumes of returned goods, you can use the Restock function to move the products to the
appropriate pick bins in one step. Described in Restocking Inventory on page 107.
Moving license plates from one bin to another bin. For warehouses that use license plates,
you can move the entire contents of a license plate using the Direct Move function.
Described in Moving Inventory on page 69.
In addition, the Direct Move function can be used for adding/ removing products from
license plates.
Finding homes for products for putaway and replenishment functions. The bin query
function linked to from Direct Move In, Receiving, and other functions, provides
PUT suggested directed putaway suggestions. Described in Finding Homes for Products on
page 110.
6 6 CHAPTER 3 M O V I N G / P U T T I NG A W A Y I N V E N T O R Y
LOOKING UP BIN CONTENTS

The Bin Lookup function allows you to find out what products are currently assigned to a
selected bin, and to view information about the statuses of selected products.
> To look up a bin:
1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Warehouse Maint. Depending
on the functions available on the main menu, you may need to press ENTER or [F3] for Next
Page of menus to find the Warehouse Maint menu item. When selected, the Warehouse
Maintenance menu is displayed.
WAREHOUSE MAINT 1/2

1-Assign Pickbins
2-Bin Lookup
3-Check License Plate
4-Product Xref
5-Formal Packsizes
6-Del Sticky Homes
7-Restock
2. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Bin
Lookup. You are prompted to enter the bin whose contents you want to look up.
BIN LOOKUP
Bin:
6 7
3. Scan the bins barcode label, or at the Bin prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER.
The products, quantities and packsizes that are currently stored in the selected bin are
displayed.
C1 1/1
Products:
1:LF211 23x25
2:LF312 2X100
4. Optionally, to view details for any product in the bin, press ENTER to display additional
screens of products, and press the number corresponding to the product for which you
want to see details. The product number and name, total quantity in the bin, and total
unallocated quantity of the product in the bin are displayed.
BIN LOOKUP
Bin:
BIN> C1
LF312 Total quantity in the bin.
Doublemint Gum
Total unallocated quantity in the
200/ 0 bin.
5. To view additional details for the product, press [F2]. Quantities of product in the
warehouse are listed by their status.
Total number of units in pick bins.
Total number of units in overstock bins.

LF312
Bin 1525 Total number of units that are allocated to sales orders.
Bulk 7500
Held Alloc 500 Total number of units that are short for sales orders.
Held Short 0
Held Repl 0 Total number of units that are held for replenishment
UnAlloc 0 for sales orders.
TOTAL REQD 500
Total number of units in all bins needed for
unallocated orders.
Total number of units needed to fill all sales orders.
6. Press ENTER to return to the list of all products assigned to this bin.
7. To view the statuses of other products, repeat steps 4 and 5.
8. To exit this function, press [F1] until you are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance
menu.
MOVING INVENTORY
A direct move is a transfer of stock from one in-warehouse location to another, either pick bin
or bulk/overstock. The Direct Move function is a generic method of moving stock within the
warehouse, which does not affect the inventory count in the warehouse. In some cases, RADIO
BEACON WMS uploads a miscellaneous adjustment to the host system that simply updates the
bin location for the moved product; in other cases, the host system never knows that products
have been moved.
You can use the Direct Move function for various purposes such as putting away received or
returned stock, moving stock from overstock bins to pick bins, or moving stock from any
temporary/staging area to final storage bins in the warehouse. If your system is configured to
allow it, you may also use the direct move to process replenishment requests (for more
information on replenishment, see Understanding Replenishment Functions on page 117).
6 9
For warehouses that use license plates, the Direct Move function can be used for a variety of
operations that let you to manage license plates in the warehouse. Direct Move can be used to
move an entire license plate from one bin to another. When you move a license plate to a
different bin, the license plate is reassigned to the new bin and the license plate is no longer
associated with the first bin location. The Direct Move function can also be used to add and
remove products from existing license plates.
If you have Supervisor privileges, you can also use the Direct Move function to reserve stock,
which prevents it from being allocated to orders. For information, see Reserving and
Unreserving Inventory on page 101.
There are two main ways of moving inventory:
In two steps
In this method, you first move the stock out from a bin to a temporary system location,
TRANSIT. Then, you move the stock in from the TRANSIT location to the desired bin.
You typically use this method when different equipment is required, when you want to
search for the best home for the product, when the out and in bins are situated at a distance
from each other, or when stock needs to be broken down into smaller packsizes.
Note: In some warehouses, the system may be configured to only allow you to move in
stock that you yourself have moved out initially.
In one step
You typically use this method when the equipment required to move the stock is the same,
when you already know to where you are moving the product, and when the out and in
bins are situated close to each other.
For each method, in/out or one-step, you can also move products in three ways:
By single product. In this method, you move a single product at a time.
By pallet. In this method, you assemble a pallet-load of multiple products and then drop
the whole pallet of products in the same bin, without having to re-scan all the items on the
pallet. License plate information is preserved when you perform a pallet move.That means
that if there are license plated products in the bin that is moved as part of the pallet move,
the license plate information will be preserved in the destination bin.
By license plate. In this method, you move all the products in a single license at one time.
To move products out from bins to the TRANSIT location, by single product, by pallet of
products, or by license plate, see Moving Products Out on page 71.
To move products in from the TRANSIT location into new bins, by single product, by pallet of
products, or by license plate, see Moving Products In on page 80.
To move products out from bins and into bins in one step, by single product, by pallet of
products, or by license plate, see Moving Products in One Step on page 91.
MOVING PRODUCTS OUT
When you move stock out, there are three methods by which you can move products to the
TRANSIT location:
By product In this method, you add products from different bins to the TRANSIT
location, one product at a time, in the quantity you select. Use this method when you want
to select the products and quantities to be moved. Follow the procedure in Moving a
Single Product Out on page 72.
By pallet In this method, you move the total quantity of all available (unallocated)
products in a single bin to the TRANSIT location. Use this method when you want to
empty multiple products from a single bin. Follow the procedure in Moving Multiple
Products (Pallet Moving) Out on page 76.
By license plate In this method, you move all products in a single license plate to the
TRANSIT location. Use this method when you want to move the all the products in a
license plate at one time, and to reassign the license plate to a new bin. Follow the
procedure in Moving a License Plate Out on page 78.
7 1
MOVING A SINGLE PRODUCT OUT
> To move a single product out:
1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Overstock. The Overstock
menu is displayed.
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
2. From the Overstock menu, press 1 to select Direct Move. You are prompted to enter the
product you want to move.
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
3. At the Product prompt, scan the products barcode label, or enter the product number
and press ENTER.
Pick bins in which the product is currently stored, for each of the first three standard
packsizes, are displayed.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
UNIT
SIZ2 A3
SIZ3 B3
1-IN 2-OUT
4. Optionally, if you want to print product labels, do the following:
To print product unit labels for the To print overstock (product case) labels
selected product, press [F8]. At the for the selected product, press [F7]. At the
#Labels prompt, enter the number of Q per P prompt, enter the packsize you
labels you want. Press ENTER to return to need for the product carton. Then, at the
the Direct Move screen. #Labels prompt, enter the number of
labels you want. Press ENTER to return to
the Direct Move screen.
5. Press 2 to move the product out of a bin. All the current locations for the product, as well
as quantities and packsizes for each bin, are displayed. If the product is part of a license
plate, the bin location and the license plate number are displayed.
Stock that has been reserved by warehouse staff is indicated with a number sign (#) to the
left of the quantity. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if necessary.
LF408 1/1
Select:
1:A3 6*25
2:C2 8*25
3:B3 5*100
4:BULK3 3*2500
6:N02 LP1234567
7 3
6. Optionally, to view the received or expiry dates (if applicable) of all inventory in each bin,
press [F9]. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if necessary.
LF408 1/1
Select:
1:A3 0207
2:C2 0207
3:B3 0207
4:BULK3 0207
5:N02 0207
7. To select a bin, go to it and scan its barcode label, or press the number corresponding to
the bin and press ENTER. The bin you have selected and the number of packs in that bin
are displayed. If your system is configured to do so, the maximum number of packs that
can be removed is also displayed.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Pickbin: B3
# Packs: 5
To Remove:
8. At the To Remove prompt, enter the number of packs you want to move out of this bin,
and press ENTER. If the product cannot be moved from this bin (because it has already
been allocated to an order) a message is displayed.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Pickbin: B3
# Packs: 5
To Remove:
0 AVAILABLE!
9. If you receive such a message, enter another quantity, or press ENTER to return to the bin
selection prompt and select another bin, by following steps 5 to 8.
unit you are moving out.
When your move is successful, the message MOVED is displayed, and the selected products
are moved to the TRANSIT system location.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Pickbin: A3
1-IN 2-OUT
MOVED
11. Do any of the following:
To move additional quantities of this product from other bins out to the TRANSIT
location, repeat steps 5 to 8 of this procedure.
To move other products out, press [F1] to return to the first Direct Move screen, and
repeat steps 3 to 8 of this procedure.
To move the products you have moved to the TRANSIT location in to bin locations,
follow any of the procedures in Moving Products In on page 80.
12. To exit this function, press [F1] twice. You are returned to the Overstock menu.
7 5
MOVING MULTIPLE PRODUCTS (PALLET MOVING) OUT
When you pallet move by bin, you move out all the available contents of one bin (i.e. all stock
that is not currently reserved or allocated to orders) in one step.
> To move multiple products out:
menu is displayed
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
2. From the Overstock menu, press 1 to select Direct Move.
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
3. Press [F5] to select Pallet Move. The Pallet Move screen is displayed, and you are
prompted to enter the bin from which you want to move all available (unallocated)
product.
2-STEP PALLET MOVE

From Bin:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F4:IN from TRANSIT
F5:Pallet Move
F6:License Move
4. At the From Bin prompt, scan the barcode label of the bin, or enter the bin number and
press ENTER. The available products are moved to the TRANSIT location, and the number
of different products moved is displayed.
2-STEP PALLET MOVE

From Bin:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F4:IN from TRANSIT
F5:Pallet Move
F6:License Move
5 MOVED
5. Optionally, to view the contents of the TRANSIT location so far, press [F8]. The products
you have added to the TRANSIT location using the Pallet Out function are displayed. To
return to the Pallet Move screen, press ENTER.
In TRANSIT 1/3
Enter, f2-PgUp
1:LF211 7x25
2:LF312 4x100
3:LF407 2x100
4:LF600 6x25
5:LF211-L 2x25
6:LF408 7x25
7 7
To move all contents of another bin to the TRANSIT location, repeat steps 4 and 5 of
this procedure.
To move the products you have moved to the TRANSIT location in to bin locations,
follow any of the procedures in Moving Products In on page 80.
MOVING A LICENSE PLATE OUT
When you license plate move, you move all the products in the license plate out of the bin, all
at one time. Moving the license plate assigns it to the bin to which it is moved.
> To move a license plate out:
menu is displayed
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
3. Press [F6] to select License Move. The License Move screen is displayed, and you are
prompted to enter the license plate you want to move.
2-STEP LICENSE MOVE

License Plate:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5:Pallet Move
F6:License Move
4. At the License Plate prompt, scan the barcode label of the license plate, or enter the
license plate number and press ENTER. The licence plate and its current bin assignment are
displayed for you to confirm the move to the TRANSIT location.
LICENSE PLATE MOVE

LICENSE PLATE #:
LP1234567
From B01
To Bin TRANSIT
Yes/No
5. At the Yes/No prompt, press Y to confirm the move or, press N to reject the move and
enter a different license plate.The products in the license plate are moved to the TRANSIT
location, and the number of different products moved is displayed.
LICENSE PLATE MOVE

LICENSE PLATE #:
LP1234567
From B01
To Bin TRANSIT
3 ITEMS MOVED
Press ENTER
7 9
To move another license plate to the TRANSIT location, repeat steps 4 and 5 of this
procedure.
To move the entire license plate you have moved to the TRANSIT location to a bin
location, follow the procedures in Moving a License Plate In on page 88.
MOVING PRODUCTS IN
When you move stock in, there are three methods by which you can move products from the
TRANSIT location:
By product In this method, you add selected products from the TRANSIT location, one
product at a time, in the quantity you select. Use this method when you want to move the
products to different bins. Follow the procedure in Moving a Single Product In on
page 81.
By pallet In this method, you move all the products that you have added to the
TRANSIT location using the Pallet Out function to a single bin. Use this method when
you want to move multiple products into a bin that can accept them, such as a carton/
overstock bin. Follow the procedure in Moving Multiple Products (Pallet Moving) In on
page 85.
By license plate In this method, you move all the products in the license plate that was
previously moved to the TRANSIT location to a new bin location. Use this method when
you want to move the all the products in a license plate at one time, and to reassign the
license plate to a new bin. Follow the procedure in Moving a License Plate In on
page 88.
Pick bins have restrictions on the products you can put into them based on their type. For
example, you cannot put two different products into a dedicated pick bin. For warehouses that
use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation, these conditions impose
additional restrictions on the products you can put into them. For example, if your warehouse
stores products using single homes, you cannot put a product into a bin if it is already stored in
another pick bin.
For warehouses that use license plates, there are additional restrictions to consider when you
move a license plate to a new bin. There are license plate-specific rules that are applied to bins;
for example, some bins may not be configured to keep license plate information. (i.e., the bin
is configured to kill license plates). There are also rules for acceptable product mixing within
a bin and/or a license plate; for example, a product cannot exist in two different packsizes in a
single license plate. Furthermore, a bin may not hold a product & packsize in both license plate
and free (non-licence plate) formats at the same time.
MOVING A SINGLE PRODUCT IN
To move a product into a bin, it must have already been moved out to the TRANSIT location
previously.
> To move a single product in:
menu is displayed.
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
product you want to move.
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
8 1
and press ENTER.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
UNIT
SIZ2 A3
SIZ3 B3
1-IN 2-OUT
4. Press 1 to move the product in to a bin. If there is more than one packsize in the TRANSIT
location, the quantities and packsizes for the TRANSIT location are displayed. If the
product is part of a license plate, the license plate numbers are displayed.
5. Press ENTER to view additional screens of quantities, if necessary.
LF408 1/1
Select:
1:TRANSIT 1*2500
2:TRANSIT 2*25
3:TRANSIT LP1234567
6. Optionally, to view the received or expiry dates (if applicable) of all inventory in the
TRANSIT location, press [F9]. Press ENTER to view additional screens of dates, if
necessary.
LF408 1/1
Location Date
1:TRANSIT 0702
2:TRANSIT 0702
3:TRANSIT 0702
7. Press the number corresponding to the packsize you are moving in. You are prompted to
enter a bin into which you want to move the inventory.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Packsize: 1
Pickslot:B3
To Bin:
8. To select a bin, do one of the following:

If you know a valid bin to which you If you want to find the most
want to move the product, go to the bin PUT appropriate bin by doing a
and scan its barcode label, or at the To bin query, press [F2] and
Bin prompt, enter the bin number and follow the procedure in
press ENTER. If you enter a bin that Finding Homes for Products on
does not exist, and you are prompted to page 110.
add the bin, press Y to add the bin or N
not to add the bin. If you press N, you
are prompted to enter a new bin.
8 3
9. If the bin you entered in step 8 does not already contain this product, or it is a random or
carton bin, and you are prompted to select a packsize, press the number corresponding to
the packsize you want to move in to this bin, and press ENTER, or press 6 to enter another
packsize, and at the New Packsize prompt, enter the packsize, and press ENTER.
Note: When you move products in, you can split or combine packs to create the packsizes
you want. However, the packsize you specify must be a multiple of the original
packsize that was moved out.
You are prompted to enter the number of packs you want to move to this bin.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Locn: C1
Qty:100*25
# Packs:
10. At the #Packs prompt, enter the number of packs you want to move to this bin, and press
ENTER. (You do not need to move all packs to the same bin.) If the product cannot be
accepted in this bin, a message is displayed.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Bin>
Locn:
CONTAINS OTHER PROD
11. If you receive such a message, select another bin and quantity by following steps 7 to 10.
When your move is successful, a message is displayed, confirming that the system has
moved the product to the selected bin.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
UNIT
SIZ2 A3
SIZ3 B3
1-IN 2-OUT
MOVED REPLENISHED
To move more of this product from the TRANSIT location to a new bin, repeat steps
4 to 11.
To move other products in, press [F1] to return to the first Direct Move screen, and
repeat steps 3 to 11.
MOVING MULTIPLE PRODUCTS (PALLET MOVING) IN
To move multiple products into a bin location, they must have already been moved out to the
TRANSIT location previously with Pallet Move Out.
Note: When you pallet-move multiple products into a bin, they must all be placed in the
same bin. Therefore, you must be sure to pallet-move only into a carton-type bin.
8 5
> To move multiple products in from a pallet:
menu is displayed.
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
2. From the Overstock menu, press 1 to select Direct Move
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
3. Press [F5] to select Pallet Move. The Pallet Move screen is displayed.
2-STEP PALLET MOVE

From Bin:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F4: IN from TRANSIT
F5: Pallet Move
F6 License Move
4. Press [F4] to select pallet move IN from TRANSIT. You are prompted for the bin to
which you want to move all the products from the TRANSIT location.
MOVE PALLET IN
Locn:
5. Optionally, to view the contents of the TRANSIT location, press [F6]. If necessary, press
ENTER TO view additional screens of products. When done, press ENTER to return to the
Pallet Move screen.
PALLET MOVE 1/1

Enter, f2-PgUp
1:LF211 7x25
2:LF312 4x100
3:Lf408 3X100
6. To select a bin to which you want to move the products, go to the bin and scan its barcode
label, or at the Locn prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. If you enter a bin
number that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add the bin or
N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.
If the product cannot be accepted in this bin, a message is displayed.
MOVE PALLET IN
Locn:
MUST BE MULTI
LOCATION!!!
8 7
7. If you receive such a message, select another bin. When your move is successful, a
message is displayed, confirming that the products have been moved to the selected bin.
2-STEP PALLET MOVE

From Bin:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F4: IN from TRANSIT
F5: Pallet Move
F6 License Move
3 MOVED
8. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Overstock menu.
MOVING A LICENSE PLATE IN
To move a license plate into a bin location, it must have already been moved out to the
TRANSIT location previously with License Move Out.
> To move a license plate in:
menu is displayed.
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
3. Press [F6] to select License Move. The License Move screen is displayed, and you are
prompted to enter the license plate you want to move.
2-STEP LICENSE MOVE

License Plate:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5:Pallet Move
F6:License Move
license plate number and press ENTER. You are prompted for the bin to which you want to
move the license plate from the TRANSIT location.
LICENSE PLATE MOVE

LICENSE PLATE #:
LP1234567
From TRANSIT
To Bin >
8 9
5. To select a bin to which you want to move the license plate, go to the bin and scan its
barcode label, or at the To Bin> prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. If you
enter a bin number that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add
the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a new bin.
If the license plate cannot be accepted in this bin, a message is displayed.
LICENSE PLATE MOVE

LICENSE PLATE #:
LP1234567
From TRANSIT
To Bin DO1
CONTAINS OTHER PROD
Press ENTER
message is displayed, confirming that the license plate has been moved to the selected bin
and displaying the number of different products moved.
LICENSE PLATE MOVE

LICENSE PLATE #:
LP1234567
From TRANSIT
To Bin B13
3 ITEMS MOVED
Press ENTER
7. Press ENTER to exit and press [F1] to return to the Overstock menu.
MOVING PRODUCTS IN ONE STEP
To move a single product in one step, follow the procedure in Moving a Single Product in
One Step on page 91.
To move multiple products in one step, follow the procedure in Moving Multiple Products
(Pallet Moving) in One Step on page 96.
To move a license plate in one step, follow the procedure in Moving a License Plate in One
Step on page 99.
MOVING A SINGLE PRODUCT IN ONE STEP
> To move a single product in one step:
menu is displayed.
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
9 1
3. Press [F2] to activate one step moving. The 1-Step Product Move screen displays, and you
are prompted to enter the product you want to move.
1-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
4. At the Product prompt, scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the product
packsizes, are displayed, and you are prompted to enter the bin from which you want to
move the product.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
UNIT
SIZ2 A3
SIZ3 B3
From Bin:
5. To select a bin, do one of the following:
If you know a valid bin from which you To view a list of bins in which the product
want to move the product, go to the bin is currently stored, press ENTER. All the
and scan its barcode label, or enter the bin current bins for the product, as well as
number and press ENTER. quantities and packsizes for each bin, are
displayed. If the product is part of a
license plate, the bin location and the
license plate number are displayed.
Stock that has been reserved by

warehouse staff is indicated with a
number sign (#) to the left of the quantity.
Press ENTER to view additional screens of
bins, if necessary.
LF408 1/1
Select:
1:A3 6*25
2:C2 8*25
3:B3 5*100
4:BULK3 3*2500
5:N02 LP1234567
Optionally, to view the received or expiry

dates (if applicable) of all inventory in
each bin, press [F9]. Press ENTER to
view additional screens of bins, if
necessary.
LF408 1/1
Select:
1:A3 0207
2:C2 0207
3:B3 0207
4:BULK3 0207
5:N02 0207
9 3
Press the number corresponding to the

bin from which you want to move the
product, and press ENTER.The bin you
selected and the number of packs in that
bin are displayed.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Locn: B3
# Packs: 5
To Remove:
6. At the To Remove prompt, enter the number of packs you want to move out of this bin,
and press ENTER. If the product cannot be moved from this bin, because it is reserved or
allocated to a sales order, a message is displayed.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Locn: B3
# Packs: 5
To Remove:
0 AVAILABLE!
7. If you receive such a message, enter another quantity, or press ENTER to return to the bin
selection prompt and select another bin, by following steps 5 and 6. When your move out
is successful, you are prompted to enter a bin to which you want to move the product.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Suggest A06
Move To:
Note: Pick bins can have restrictions on the products you can put into them based on their
type. For example, you cannot put two different products into a dedicated pick bin.
For warehouses that use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation,
these conditions impose additional restrictions on the products you can put into them.
For example, if your warehouse stores products using single homes, you cannot put a
product into a bin if it is already stored in another pick bin.
8. Go to the desired bin and scan its barcode label, or at the Move To prompt, enter a bin
number and press ENTER. If the bin does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin,
press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to enter a
new bin.
9. If the bin you entered in step 8 does not already contain this product, and you are
prompted to select a packsize, press the number corresponding to the packsize you want to
move into this bin and press ENTER, or press 6 to enter a different packsize, and at the New
Packsize prompt, enter the packsize, and press ENTER.
Note: When you move products in, you can split or combine packs to create the packsizes
you want. However, the packsize you specify must be a multiple of the original
packsize that was moved out.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Suggest A06
Move To:
D Bin in use!
10. If you receive such a message, select another bin.
9 5
unit you are moving.
12. When your move is successful, a message is displayed, confirming that the system has
moved the product to the selected bin.
1-STEP PRODUCT MOVE
Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
MOVED!
13. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Overstock menu.
MOVING MULTIPLE PRODUCTS (PALLET MOVING) IN ONE

STEP
One-step pallet moving removes all available contents from one bin to another.
Note: When you pallet move multiple products into a bin, they must all be placed in the
same bin. Therefore, you must be sure to pallet move only to a carton-type bin.
> To move multiple products in one step:
menu is displayed.
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
3. Press [F2] to activate one step moving, then press [F5] to pallet move. The 1- Step Pallet
Move screen is displayed, and you are prompted to enter the bin from which you want to
move all available products.
1-STEP PALLET MOVE

From Bin:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
4. At the From Bin prompt, scan the barcode label of the bin, or enter the bin number and
press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the bin to which you want to move the products.
MOVE PALLET IN
From Bin:B2
Locn:
9 7
5. Go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or at the Locn prompt, enter the bin number and
press ENTER. If you enter a bin number that does not exist, and you are prompted to add
the bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, you are prompted to
enter a new bin.
MOVE PALLET IN
From Bin:B2
Locn:
CONTAINS OTHER PROD
6. If you receive such a message, select a new bin. When your move is successful, you are
returned to the main Direct move screen, and a message is displayed, indicating the
number of different products that were moved.
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
2 MOVED
7. Press [F1] to return to the Overstock menu.
MOVING A LICENSE PLATE IN ONE STEP
One-step license plate moving moves all the products in the specified license plate from one
bin to another. The license plate information is preserved in the move.
Note: In addition to regular bin restrictions, there are license plate-specific rules that are
applied to bins; for example, some bins may not be configured to keep license plate
information. (i.e., the bin is configured to kill license plates). There are also rules
for acceptable product mixing within a bin and/or a license plate; for example, a
product cannot exist in two different packsizes in a single license plate. Furthermore,
a bin may not hold a product & packsize in both license plate and free (non-licence
plate) formats at the same time.
> To move the license plate in one step:
menu is displayed.
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
9 9
3. Press [F2] to activate one step moving, then press [F6] to license move. The 1- Step
License Move screen is displayed., and you are prompted to enter the license plate you
want to move.
1-STEP LICENSE MOVE

License Plate:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
license plate number and press ENTER. You are prompted for the bin to which you want to
move the license plate.
LICENSE PLATE MOVE

LICENSE PLATE #:
LP1234567
From N01
To Bin >
5. To select a bin to which you want to move the license plate, go to the bin and scan its
barcode label, or at the To Bin prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER. If you
If the license plate cannot be accepted in this bin, a message is displayed.
LICENSE PLATE MOVE

LICENSE PLATE #:
LP1234567
From N01
To Bin DO1
CONTAINS OTHER PROD
Press ENTER
1 0 0 CHAPTER 3 M O V I N G / P U T T I NG A W A Y I N V E N T O R Y
message is displayed, confirming that the license plate has been moved to the selected bin
and displaying the number of different products that were moved.
LICENSE PLATE MOVE

LICENSE PLATE #:
LP1234567
From N01
To Bin B13
3 ITEMS MOVED
Press ENTER
7. Press ENTER to exit and press [F1] to return to the Overstock menu.
RESERVING AND UNRESERVING INVENTORY

If you have the correct privileges, you can reserve inventory by selecting Reserve Stock in the
Direct Move function. This function is typically used for products that need to be quarantined
or inspected before being made available to regular inventory. When inventory is reserved, it is
prevented from being allocated to sales orders. To reserve stock, follow the procedure in
Reserving Inventory on page 102.
Again, provided you have Supervisor privileges, you can also use the Reserve Stock function
to unreserve inventory that you have previously reserved, or that has been reserved by another
user. To unreserve stock, follow the procedure in Unreserving Inventory on page 105.
1 0 1
RESERVING INVENTORY
> To reserve inventory of a product:
menu is displayed.
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
product you want to reserve.
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
and press ENTER.
packsizes, are displayed
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
UNIT
SIZ2 A3
SIZ3 B3
1-IN 2-OUT
4. Press [F9] to reserve stock of this product. All bins in which the product is currently
stored are displayed, as well as the quantity and packsize for each bin. If the product is
part of a license plate, the bin location and the license plate number are displayed. Stock
that has already been reserved by warehouse staff is indicated with a number sign (#) to
the left of the quantity. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if necessary.
LF211 1/1
Select:
1:C1 13*25
2:D1 5*25
3:D1 4*100
4:BULK1 4*2500
5:N01 LP1234567
1 0 3
LF211 1/1
Location Date
1:C1 0207
2:D1 0207
3:D1 0207
4:BULK1 0207
5:N01 0207
6. Scan the barcode label of the bin whose inventory you want to reserve, or press the
number corresponding to the appropriate bin and press ENTER. A message is displayed,
indicating the quantity, packsize, and bin location for the product that you are reserving.
You are prompted to enter a comment.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
WILL BE RESERVED
C1 13*25
Enter Comment
(f1 to cancel)
7. To confirm that you want to reserve the stock, enter a comment up to 16 characters long,
and press ENTER; otherwise, press [F1] to cancel the reservation and return to the product
selection screen.
If you confirmed the reservation, the message Reserved is displayed.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
UNIT
SIZ2 A3
SIZ3 B3
1-IN 2-OUT
RESERVED
8. Press ENTER to return to the product selection screen.
9. To reserve additional products, repeat steps 3 to 7.
UNRESERVING INVENTORY
If you have the correct privileges, you can unreserve stock that has been reserved by yourself
or by another user.
> To unreserve reserved inventory:
menu is displayed
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
product you want to unreserve.
2-STEP PRODUCT MOVE

Product:
F2:1-Step F3:2-Step
F5: Pallet Move

F6 License Move
1 0 5
and press ENTER.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
UNIT
SIZ2 A3
SIZ3 B3
1-IN 2-OUT
4. Press [F9] to unreserve stock of this product. All bins in which the product is currently
stored are displayed. If the product is part of a license plate, the bin location and the
license plate number are displayed. Currently reserved stock is indicated with a number
sign (#) to the left of the quantity. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if
necessary.
LF408 1/1
Select:
1:C1 #13*25
2:D1 5*25
3:D1 4*100
4:BULK1 4*2500
5:N01 LP1234567
5. Scan the barcode label of the bin whose inventory you want to unreserve, or press the
number corresponding to the appropriate bin (marked with the #) and press ENTER. A
message is displayed, confirming that the stock is no longer reserved.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
WILL BE RESERVED
C1 13*25
This product is no
longer reserved.
6. Press ENTER to return to the product selection screen.
7. To unreserve additional products, repeat steps 3 to 5.
8. To exit this function, press F1 twice. You are returned to the Overstock menu.
RESTOCKING INVENTORY
The Restock function may be used to process product returns or even build-to-stock kits and
packaging items. The Restock function moves the returned inventory from a cart location to
a bin where the product is currently stored. Thus the inventory must already have been
received or adjusted into a cart location before you can restock it.
Once the inventory has been placed into a cart location, the Restock function takes you on a
directed walk through the warehouse, in pick bin sequence, to return the products to the
appropriate bins. Although you move all products on the cart at one time, you can put each
product away separately to its appropriate bin.
Note: You can only use the Restock function to return product to a bin in which it is
currently stored in the same packsize. (The system directs you to this bin.) If the
product is not currently stored in such a bin, you cannot use the Restock function, but
must use a different function, such as Direct Move (see Moving Inventory on
page 69), or a miscellaneous adjustment (see Adjusting Inventory on page 325), to
move it to a bin.
1 0 7
> To restock inventory:
1. From the main menu, press ENTER to view the second screen of functions, if necessary,
and press the number corresponding to Warehouse Maint. The Warehouse Maintenance
menu is displayed.
WAREHOUSE MAINT 1/2

1-Assign Pickbins
2-Bin Lookup
4-Product Xref
5-Formal Packsizes
6-Del Sticky Homes
7-Restock
2. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Restock.
You are prompted to enter the cart location from which you are moving the stock.
RESTOCK TO BIN
Cart Location
>
3. Scan the barcode label of the cart, or enter the cart number and press ENTER. The number
of different products in the cart location you selected is displayed.
RESTOCK TO BIN
Cart: CART1
3 Items
4. Press ENTER to continue. If the product is not currently stored in a bin, in the same
packsize, the message No Home Bin for this Packsize is displayed. Press ENTER to
skip this product and go to the next one. Otherwise, the first product is displayed, as well
as the first sequential bin in which it is currently stored in the packsize on the cart, and you
are prompted to verify the bin.
RESTOCK TO BIN
LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Bin:A3
Scan the Bin
>
5. Go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. You are
prompted to enter the quantity to restock to that bin.
RESTOCK TO BIN
LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Packsize:25
Bin: A3
Quantity:
( On Cart: 4 )
6. Put away the desired quantity, and at the Quantity prompt, enter the quantity you put
away, and press ENTER. (You do not have to put away the total quantity on the cart at the
same time.) If there are additional products on the cart, you are prompted to scan the bin
for the next product.
1 0 9
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all remaining products on the cart. When you have put away all
products, a message is displayed, indicating that the restock is complete.
RESTOCK TO BIN
Cart Location
>
Completed
8. To restock items from other cart locations, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the main menu.
FINDING HOMES FOR PRODUCTS

When you are putting away or moving products into bins, you can do a bin query to search for
the best bin location for your product, either by finding a current home for the product, or by
PUT finding an empty bin that can store the product. This directed putaway function is available
when you are prompted to select a bin to which to move product, from the following functions:
All receiving functions for information, see Putting Away Products on page 48 and
Receiving without a Purchase Order on page 45.
Single-product Direct Move In for information, see Moving a Single Product In on

page 81.
Fill Bins or one-step replenishment functions for information, see Selecting the Bins
to Fill on page 144.
Once you select a bin from the query function, you are returned immediately to the original
function you were executing. The following procedure is applicable to all functions.
> To find a home for a product:
1. From any of the functions listed above, press [F2]. A screen is displayed providing a
summary of the availability of the product in different packsizes and zones.
Available packsizes.
ROTATE TO OVERSTOCK Zone(s) in which this packsize is available.

Pack Zone DOH 30DAY
1- 1 40 950 Number of days the product is expected to
2- 25 >30 0 be available based on product velocity
3- 100 0 0 calculations.
4- 0 0 0
5- 0 0 0 Quantities required to fill sales orders for the
Homes (1-5): next period indicated, according to velocity
calculation parameters.
Note: If all the inventory of the product in D-N-R bins has been allocated, the heading Rush
to Pick Bins is displayed at the top of the screen.
2. To search for a home for the product, press the number corresponding to the packsize and
zone in which you want to search for a bin, and press ENTER. Current homes for the
product are displayed, as well as the on-hand quantity. An asterisk (*) indicates a
dedicated, non-dedicated, or random pick bin.
Packsize
SIZ2:25/1 O/H
1- C3 7*
2- A4 4* Bin
Number of packs
on hand
Enter - find empty
SELECT BIN:
3. Optionally, to print putaway labels for the product, press [F7]. You are returned to the
original function. To return to the bin query function, repeat steps 1 and 2.
1 1 1
To go to the previous screen and select another packsize or zone to view, press [F1].
To exit this function without making a selection, press [F1] twice. You are returned to
your original function.
To select one of the products current homes, follow the procedure in Selecting a
Current Home on page 112.
To search for an empty bin to which to move the product, follow the procedure in
Finding an Empty Bin on page 113.
SELECTING A CURRENT HOME
> To select a current home for a product:
1. From the list of bins displayed, press the number corresponding to the bin you want. If the
product cannot be accepted in this bin (for example, if the packsize you are trying to move
is not accepted in the destination bin), you are returned to the bin selection prompt. If the
product can be accepted, this bin is immediately displayed as the selected bin for the
function you were previously executing.
2. From the original function, when prompted to confirm the bin, do one of the following:
To accept the selection, scan the bins barcode label, or enter the bin number at the
prompt and press ENTER.
To disregard your selection, use any of the methods available in the function to select
a different bin, including doing another bin query by following this procedure from
the beginning.
3. Continue by following the instructions for your respective function.
FINDING AN EMPTY BIN
You can find all empty bins in the system, and narrow your search to find only bins that meet
specific criteria, such as bin range, size code, handle code, or reach code. (For an explanation
of these, see Bin/Bin Type in Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS.)
If bin capacities have been defined for products for any empty dedicated bins, the maximum
quantity of the product that you can move to an empty bin will be displayed. For more
information on setting bin capacities, see Setting or Modifying a Products Bin Capacities on
page 354 of Chapter 12, Warehouse And Product Maintenance.
> To search for an empty bin:
1. From the list of bins displayed, press ENTER to search for any empty bins in the
warehouse. If ABC, size, reach, or handle codes have been defined for the product, they
are displayed. An asterisk (*) indicates a dedicated, non-dedicated, or random pick bin. If
any empty bins are found, they are displayed.
SIZ2:25 ABC:A Zone

HDL:
1 B: BULK1
Bin
2 G: A3 *
1 1 3
2. From the list of bins displayed, press the number corresponding to the bin you want. If
you selected a dedicated bin, and a bin cap has been defined for it, the maximum number
of products that can be stored in the bin is displayed (0 if no maximum has been defined).
You are prompted to confirm the selection.
EMPTY LOCATION:
LF408
Pak: SIZ2:25/1
Bin: A3
Cap: 0
F7 - Print Label
Enter - Accept
To print a putaway label for the product, To confirm the bin selection, press ENTER.
press [F7]. You are returned to the original If the product cannot be accepted in this
function. To return to the bin query bin (for example, if the bin is sticky and
function, repeat the steps from the the product and/or packsize you are trying
beginning of the procedure. to move is not accepted in the destination
bin), you are returned to the bin selection
prompt. If the product can be accepted,
this bin is immediately displayed as the
selected bin for the function you were
previously executing.
4. From the original function, when prompted to confirm the bin, do one of the following:
To accept the selection, scan the bins barcode label, or enter the bin number at the
prompt and press ENTER.
To disregard your selection, use any of the methods available in the function to select
a different bin, including doing another bin query by following this procedure from
the beginning.
5. Continue by following the instructions for your respective function.
MOVING SERIALIZED PRODUCTS

ATT If you want to quickly and easily move serialized products to a bin, you can scan a bin, and
then repeatedly scan serial numbers. Each serial will be moved to that bin. This is quicker than
a direct move, because you dont need to scan or enter the bin from which you are moving the
product. Because serial numbers should be unique, RADIO BEACON knows the bin that the
product is currently in and you only have to scan the bin into which the product will be put.
> To move serialized products:
menu is displayed.
OVERSTOCK 1/2
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Label Printing
5-Carton Route
6-Move Serial
2. From the Overstock menu, press the number corresponding to Move Serial. The Move
Serials screen is displayed and you are prompted to enter the bin into which you want to
move the serial products.
Move Serials
Bin:
1 1 5
3. At the Bin prompt, scan the barcode label of the bin, or enter the bin number and press
ENTER. You are prompted to enter the bin to which you want to move the products. If you
You are prompted for a serial number.
Move Serials
To Bin: A01
Serial:
4. At the Serial prompt, scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the serial number
and press ENTER. A message indication that the move was successful is displayed.
Move Serials
To Bin: A01
Serial:
Serial Moved!
5. Press [F1] to return to the Overstock menu.
4 REPLENISHING
PICK BINS
UNDERSTANDING REPLENISHMENT FUNCTIONS

Replenishment is the process of removing stock from overstock bins, breaking the stock into
smaller packsizes, and moving them to pick bins or to work areas. Unlike Direct Move,
replenishment is always performed in response to a replenishment request that has been issued
by the system. The request may be generated by a sales or work order allocation, the Advance
Replenishment function, or even manually entered from the handheld (for information on
creating a replenishment request from the handheld, see Creating Replenishment Requests
on page 119).
Note: Replenishment does not always have to be done from actual carton/overstock bins or
larger packsizes. If inventory exists in pickable bins, and those bins were included
when the replenishment requests were generated during allocation, you may be
instructed to replenish from pick bins.
Once a replenishment request has been generated, there are a number of ways by which you
can find out which stock should be replenished to which bins:
By following letdown tickets. If your system is configured to print these automatically,

they are printed whenever a replenishment request is issued.
By following a Replenishment Report printed by your dispatcher.
1 1 7
By using the Bin Lookup function. This function can help you to identify products that are
marked HELD FOR REPLENISHMENT and need to be moved to pick bins. For
procedures for looking up bins, see Looking Up Bin Contents on page 67.
By warehouse policy. You may have a policy that establishes a routine for replenishing
stock, without the need for printed letdown tickets.
Replenishment can be performed in a number of ways, which will depend on your

configuration:
In two steps
In this method, you first let down the stock from overstock (bulk) bins. The stock is
moved to a temporary system location, REPLENIS, and a fill-bin request is issued. Then,
you fill pick bins with the let down stock. You typically use this method when different
equipment is required, overstock and pick bins are situated at a distance from each other,
or you want to use the stock to fill multiple pick bins.Letting down stock is described in
Letting Down Stock on page 123. Filling bins with let down stock is described in
Filling Bins on page 141.
In one step
If your configuration allows this, in this method, no fill-bin request is issued, but you
move the stock immediately to a single final destination. Your warehouse will typically
use this method when the equipment required to move the stock is the same, the overstock
and pick bins are situated close to each other, or you only need to fill a single pick bin. In
this method, you are immediately prompted to fill bins as soon as you have let down the
stock. Letting down product for work orders is normally performed in one step.
By Direct Move
If your system is configured to allow it, you can use the Direct Move function to process
replenishment requests. For procedures for direct moving, see Moving Inventory on
page 69.
1 1 8 CHAPTER 4 R E P L E N I S H I N G P I C K B I N S
These replenishments functions are available through the Overstock menu.
> To access the Overstock menu:
From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Overstock. The Overstock menu is
displayed:
OVERSTOCK
1-Direct Move
2-Letdown Stock
3-Fill Bins
4-Carton Route
5-Move Serial
Note: The options available in the Overstock menu will depend on your permissions.
CREATING REPLENISHMENT REQUESTS

You can create a replenishment request on-the-fly from the handheld with the Request
Replenish function, for unallocated, unreserved product in overstock bins (that is, carton-type
(C) bins only). If your system is configured to do so, letdown tickets will automatically be
printed for the products required.
1 1 9
> To request replenishment:
1. From the main menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary,
and press the number corresponding to Warehouse Maint. The Warehouse Maintenance
menu is displayed.
WAREHOUSE MAINT 1/2 WAREHOUSE MAINT 2/2

1-Assign Pickbins 1:Request Replenis
2-Bin Lookup 2:Product Maint
4-Product Xref
5-Formal Packsizes
6-Del Sticky Homes
7-Restock
Note: The options available in the Warehouse Maintenance menu will depend on your
permissions.
2. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of
functions, if necessary, and press the number corresponding to Request Replenis.
3PL If your system supports multiple companies/clients, and you are prompted for the client
name, enter the client name/number and press ENTER.
You are prompted to enter the product you want to replenish.
REQUEST REPLEN
Product
3. Scan the products barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER.
If there is no stock of the product in carton bins the message None Available in
Overstock is displayed. If there is stock of the product in carton bins, you are prompted
to select the carton bin from which you would like to request replenishment. If the product
is part of a license plate, the bin location and the license plate number are displayed.
LF408 1/1
Select:
1: BULK3 10*25
2:
3:
LF408 1/1
Location Date
1:BULK3 0207
2:BULK4 0407
5. Enter the number corresponding to the bin from which you want to request replenishment.
The number of packs actually available for replenishment is displayed.
REQUEST REPLEN
LF408
PACKS OF 250
10 AVAILABLE
QTY TO REQUEST:
1 2 1
6. Optionally, to view the requests already in queue, press [F2].
LF408
REQUEST IN QUEUE
2500
REQUESTED IB LETDOWN:
250:
Press ENTER
to continue...
7. The quantity for which there are existing replenishments requests for the product is
displayed in the REQUEST IN QUEUE field (for two-step replenishment, this is the number
of let-down requests). For two-step replenishment, the quantity of the product in
REPLENIS system locations, and awaiting fill bins is displayed in REQUESTED IN
LETDOWN field.
Press ENTER to return to the Qty to Request prompt.
8. Optionally, to view the quantity in transit (i.e., in a TRANSIT system location as a result
of a 2-step direct move in the warehouse), press [F3].
LF408
IN TRANSIT
3000
Press ENTER
to continue...
9. The total quantity of the product that is in the process of being moved in the warehouse
and is currently in a TRANSIT system location (in a 2-step direct move) is displayed in
the IN TRANSIT field. For information about direct moves, see Moving Inventory on
page 69.
Press ENTER to return to the Qty to Request prompt.
10. If there are not more than 0 available, press ENTER to return to the Product prompt to
select another product; otherwise, at the Qty to Request prompt, enter the number of
packs you would like to replenish to pick bins, and press ENTER. The replenishment
request is generated, and you are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.
LETTING DOWN STOCK

Letting down stock with the Letdown Stock function is the first step to replenishing the stock
in a pick bin (or the only step, if you are using one-step replenishment). Replenishment
requests indicate which products need to be let down.
To initiate a letdown, you select a method of letting down stock; that is, you select the
replenishment requests you want to process, based on one of five criteria:
By group This method takes you sequentially through overstock bins in your
warehouse for which replenishment requests have been issued starting from the first
bin you specify according to the replenishment group you want to process. This
method is described in Letting Down Stock by Group on page 124.
By quantity This method displays a list of bins for which replenishment requests have
been issued sorted from the highest quantity required to the lowest quantity and lets
you select from the list. This method is often useful if you want to replenish large
quantities first, or need to plan the type of equipment you will need to let down the stock.
This method is described in Letting Down Stock by Quantity on page 128.
By product This method allows you to let down stock for all requests for a single
product at a time. This is often useful if a certain product must be replenished
immediately, or if you are using letdown tickets. This method is described in Letting
Down Stock by Product on page 132.
By pick zone If your system uses multiple zones, this method takes you sequentially
ZONE through overstock bins in your warehouse for which replenishment requests have been
issued starting from the first bin you specify according to the zone which you want
to replenish. This method is useful if you need to replenish particular zones in a certain
sequence, or if you want to be able to organize the let down stock according to the zone to
which it will be put away. This method is described in Letting Down Stock by Zone on
page 135.
By kit This method is used for gathering the components needed to fill work or
KIT packaging orders. You can let down stock for multiple kit or packaging orders at a time.
This method is described in Letting Down Stock by Kit on page 139.
1 2 3
Once you have removed the appropriate stock from the bins, you are instructed on how to
break it down into smaller packsizes.
Tip: In most situations, you should remove more product from the overstock bins than
required for the specific replenishment request. This will reduce the future number of
replenishment requests for the product. The Letdown Stock function displays the
quantity expected to be required to fill sales orders for a certain number of days (this
is specified in your configuration; by default it is 1 day). You can use this forecast
quantity as a guide in deciding how much product you should replenish.
LETTING DOWN STOCK BY GROUP
When you let down stock by group, you select the first bin from which you want the system to
search for a replenishment request.
If your dispatcher has assigned replenishment requests to groups during allocation, according
to particular criteria, such as the customer for orders, the date required for orders, and so on,
you can select the replenishment groups you want to fulfill. You may even be assigned to
specific groups, or you may be required to select groups in a particular sequence.
REPLEN Note: Whether your warehouse uses dispatcher-defined replenishment groups or not, any
replenishment requests that have been generated by the Advance Replenishment
function are automatically assigned to the group ADVANCE. Any replenishment
KIT requests for kit orders are automatically assigned to separate groups for each work
order, identified by the work order number.
> To let down stock by group:
1. From the Overstock menu, press the number corresponding to Letdown Stock. The
Letdown Stock menu is displayed.
LETDOWN STOCK
1- By Group
2- By Quantity
3- By PRODUCT
4- By Pick Zone
5- By Kit
2. Press 1 to select By Group. Each replenishment group appears in sequence, with the
number of letdown requests for each group displayed to the right of the name of each
replenishment group. The first item in the list always corresponds to all replenishment
groups.
1/1
Select:
1:ALL GROUPS 10 Number of letdown requests for this group.
2: 6
3:July9alloc 2
4:june24 1
Note: You cannot let down stock destined for kit orders for different work areas at the same
time. You must first complete the replenishment (including the fill-bin step that
moves the product to the work area) for one work area before you can let down stock
destined for another work area.
1 2 5
3. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of replenishment groups, and press
the number corresponding to the group for which you want to let down stock. You are
prompted to enter the overstock bin from which you want to begin your search for
replenishment requests.
LETDOWN STOCK
1st Bulk Locn:
4. Scan the barcode label of the first bin in the warehouse from which you want to search for
replenishment requests, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The system searches for
all requests beginning with that bin, sequentially, through to the last overstock bin.
5. If there are no replenishment requests past that bin, enter another bin, until you are
directed to the first bin with a replenishment request. The quantity and packsize required
to process the replenishment request are displayed, as are breakpack instructions.
Quantity expected to be required for sales orders

for the period indicated, according to forecasting
LETDOWN STOCK 1DAY parameters.
LF408 1300 Quantity and packsize currently in the bin.
Tic Tac Freshmint
>BULK3 3*2500 Number of packs to remove to process this
Qty Reqd: 1 replenishment request.
Packs Out:
Break to Pack: 100 Packsize required to fill pick bins for this
Group: replenishment request.
6. If you want to skip this product and go to the next request, press [F3]. Otherwise, remove
the desired number of packs, and at the Packs Out prompt, enter the quantity of packs you
removed, and press ENTER.
If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, and you are prompted for
unit you are letting down.
You are prompted to break down the quantity into the appropriate packsize.
LETDOWN STOCK
LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Group:
BREAK DOWN INTO

25 PACKS OF 100
7. Break down the product into the displayed packsize and press ENTER to continue. If there
are additional replenishment requests for this bin or for any bins in the replenishment
group(s) you selected, you are prompted to let down stock for the next request.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for all remaining replenishment requests. When you have let down
stock for all bins in the group and range you selected, a message is displayed that there are
no outstanding replenishment requests for this group/range.
LETDOWN STOCK
There are no
outstanding
replenishment
requests past
BULK1
9. Press ENTER to return to the group selection menu.
1 2 7
10. Repeat steps 3 to 9 for other replenishment groups you want to replenish, or press [F1] to
exit and return to the Replenishment menu. When you have filled all replenishment
requests, a message is displayed.
LETDOWN STOCK
There are no
outstanding
replenishment
requests for
group.
11. Press [F1] to return to the Letdown Stock menu.
LETTING DOWN STOCK BY QUANTITY
> To let down stock by quantity:
LETDOWN STOCK
1- By Group
2- By Quantity
3- By PRODUCT
4- By Pick Zone
5- By Kit
2. Press 2 to select By Quantity. You are prompted to enter the overstock bin from which
you want to begin your search for replenishment requests.
LETDOWN STOCK
1st Bulk Locn:
3. Scan the barcode label of the bin, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The system
searches for all requests beginning with that bin, sequentially, through to the last
overstock bin.
Note: You cannot let down stock destined for kit or packaging orders for different work
KIT areas at the same time. You must first complete the replenishment (including the fill-
bin step that moves the product to the work area) for one work area before you can let
down stock destined for another work area.
4. If there are no replenishment requests past that bin, enter another bin. If there are multiple
replenishment requests, a list of bins with replenishment requests is displayed, in order of
the quantity of products, from highest to lowest, for all selected overstock bins.
REPLENISH 1/1
Select Location>
1:BULK3 7
2:BULK3 5
3:BULK1 1
4:BULK1 1
1 2 9
5. To select a bin, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or press ENTER to view additional
screens of bins, press the number corresponding to the bin you want to select, and press
ENTER. The quantity and packsize required to process the replenishment request are
displayed, as are breakpack instructions.

Tic Tac Freshmint
Packs Out:
replenishment request.
LETDOWN STOCK
LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Group:
BREAK DOWN INTO

25 PACKS OF 100
are additional replenishment requests for this product, you are returned to the Select Item
screen.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each remaining replenishment request. When you have let down
stock for all remaining replenishment requests, a message is displayed that there are no
outstanding replenishment requests past the bin you initially entered.
LETDOWN STOCK
There are no
outstanding
replenishment
requests past BULK1
9. Press ENTER to return to the bulk location selection prompt.
10. Repeat steps 3 to 9 for other bulk locations from which you want to let down stock, or
press [F1] to exit and return to the Replenishment menu. When you have filled all
replenishment requests, a message is displayed.
LETDOWN STOCK
There are no
outstanding
replenishment
requests for
quantity.
1 3 1
LETTING DOWN STOCK BY PRODUCT
When you let down stock by product, you select the product you want to let down, and the
system directs you to all bins with a replenishment request for that product.
> To let down stock by product:
LETDOWN STOCK
1- By Group
2- By Quantity
3- By PRODUCT
4- By Pick Zone
5- By Kit
2. Press 3 to select By Product. You are prompted to enter the number of the product you
want to let down.
REPLENISHMENT
PRODUCT>
3. Scan the products barcode label or enter the product number and press ENTER.
If there is more than one replenishment request for this product, a list of bins from which
stock needs to be let down is displayed.
REPLENISH 1/1
Select Location>
Tic Tac Freshmint
1:BULK3 2500
2:BULK4 2500
Note: You cannot let down stock destined for kit orders for different work areas at the same
time. You must first complete the replenishment (including the fill-bin step that
moves the product to the work area) for one work area before you can let down stock
destined for another work area.
4. To select a bin, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or press ENTER to view additional
screens of bins, press the number corresponding to the bin you want to select, and press
ENTER. You are directed to the bin, and the quantity and packsize required to process the
replenishment request are displayed, as are breakpack instructions.

Tic Tac Freshmint
Packs Out:
1 3 3
5. Remove the desired number of packs, and at the Packs Out prompt, enter the quantity of
packs you removed.
LETDOWN STOCK
LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Group:
BREAK DOWN INTO

25 PACKS OF 100
are additional replenishment requests for this product, the Select Location screen is re-
displayed; otherwise you are returned to the product selection prompt.
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 for each remaining replenishment request for this product. When you
have let down stock for all remaining replenishment requests for the product, a message is
displayed that there are no outstanding replenishment requests for the product.
LETDOWN STOCK
There are no
outstanding
replenishment
requests for
Product LF408
9. Press ENTER to return to the product selection prompt.
10. To replenish other products, repeat steps 3 to 9; otherwise, press [F1] to return to the
Replenishment menu. When you have let down stock for all replenishment requests, a
message is displayed.
LETDOWN STOCK
There are no
outstanding
replenishment
requests for
product.
LETTING DOWN STOCK BY ZONE
ZONE Letting down stock by zone selects replenishment requests based on the zone to which the
stock is being replenished.
> To let down stock by pick zone:
LETDOWN STOCK
1- By Group
2- By Quantity
3- By PRODUCT
4- By Pick Zone
5- By Kit
1 3 5
2. Press 4 to select By Pick Zone. Each pick zone with replenishment requests appears in
sequence, with the number of letdown requests for each zone displayed to the right of the
zone. The first item in the list always corresponds to all zones.
1/1
Select:
1:ALL ZONES 3
2: ZONE D 2
3: ZONE G 1
3. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of zones, and press the number
corresponding to the zone for which you want to let down stock. You are prompted to
enter the overstock bin from which you want to begin your search for replenishment
requests.
REPLENISHMENT
1st Bulk Locn:
4. Scan the barcode label of the bin, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The system
searches for all requests beginning with that bin, sequentially, through to the last
overstock bin.
5. If there are no replenishment requests past that bin, enter another bin, until you are
directed to the first bin with a replenishment request. The quantity and packsize required
to process the replenishment request are displayed, as are breakpack instructions.

Tic Tac Freshmint
Packs Out:
LETDOWN STOCK
LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Group:
BREAK DOWN INTO

25 PACKS OF 100
are additional replenishment requests for this bin or from any bins, for the pick zone(s)
you selected, you are prompted to let down stock for the next request.
1 3 7
9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 for all remaining replenishment requests. When you have let down
stock from all bins for the pick zone you selected, a message is displayed that there are no
outstanding replenishment requests for those pick zones.
LETDOWN STOCK
There are no
outstanding
replenishment
requests for
GD
10. Press ENTER to return to the pick zone selection screen.
11. Repeat steps 3 to 10 for other pick zones you want to replenish, or press [F1] to exit and
return to the Replenishment menu. When you have filled all replenishment requests, a
message is displayed.
LETDOWN STOCK
There are no
outstanding
replenishment
requests for
pick zones.
LETTING DOWN STOCK BY KIT
Letting down stock by kit selects replenishment requests based on the work or packaging order
KIT for which the component products are required. You can let down the stock for several kit/
packaging orders at a time. Note, however, that you cannot let down stock destined to different
work areas at the same time. You must complete the replenishment for one work area before
beginning to let down stock for another one. Depending on your configuration, you may also
be required to verify the work area to which you are moving items for a packaging order.
Let-down by kit may be performed in one step or two steps. While most warehouses let down
work and packaging orders in one step, your configuration may require a separate fill-bin step;
if that is the case, see the procedure in Filling Bins on page 141. The following procedure
illustrates the one-step method.
> To replenish by kit:
Replenishment menu is displayed.
LETDOWN STOCK
1- By Group
2- By Quantity
3- By PRODUCT
4- By Pick Zone
5- By Kit
2. Press 5 to select By Kit. You are prompted to enter the work order for which you are
replenishing products.
LETDOWN STOCK
WO#:
WorkOrders:0
1 3 9
3. Enter the work/packaging order number and press ENTER. The number of orders is
increased by 1.
4. Repeat step 3 for each work/packaging order you want to let down.
5. When you are ready to begin letting down stock, press [F2]. You are directed to the first
bin with a component replenishment request for the orders you selected.
LETDOWN STOCK 14DAY Quantity and packsize currently in the bin.

LF312 0
Doublemint Gum Number of packs to remove to process this
>B2 12*100 replenishment request.
Qty Reqd: 1
PACKS OUT:
BREAK TO PACK:1 Packsize required to fill pick bin for this
removed. The work area for this kit order is displayed, and you are prompted to break
down the quantity into the appropriate packsize or unit required for this order.
LETDOWN STOCK
LF312
Doublemint Gum
Kit: W-101
Workarea: WORK1
BREAK DOWN INTO
100 PACKS OF 1
7. Break down the product into the displayed packsize, move the components to the
displayed work area, and press ENTER to continue. If there are additional replenishment
requests for the work orders you selected, you are prompted to let down stock for the next
request.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each remaining replenishment request until you have let down all
components required for each order. When all components are let down, a message is
displayed confirming the replenishment.
LETDOWN STOCK
There are no
outstanding
replenishment
requests for
W01234.BTO.
9. Press ENTER to return to the work order selection prompt.
10. To let down stock for additional work/packaging orders, repeat steps 3 to 9.
11. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Letdown Stock menu.
FILLING BINS
If your system is configured to require two-step replenishment, stock that has been let down
through any of the Letdown Stock functions is kept in a temporary system location named
REPLENIS (or REPLEN99, where 99 is your warehouse number). As long as the stock is in
this location, it cannot be used to fulfill orders.
To make the stock available for allocating to orders, a fill-bin request is issued for each product
that has been let down. You use the Fill Bins function to move stock from the REPLENIS
location to a pick bin or bins.
1 4 1
The steps for filling bins are:
1. Identify the let down product with which you want to fill bins. Follow the procedures in
Selecting the Product to Move on page 142.
2. Select a bin or bins to which you want to move the product (except for work areas). There
are several ways of selecting bins to fill. All of these are described in Selecting the Bins
to Fill on page 144.
SELECTING THE PRODUCT TO MOVE
> To select the product to move:
1. From the Overstock menu, press the number corresponding to Fill Bins. You are
prompted to enter the number of the product with which you want to fill bins.
FILL BINS
PRODUCT>
2. Scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the product number and press ENTER.
If there are multiple fill-bin requests for this product, a list of them is displayed.
LF408 1/1
Select:
1:REPLENIS 25*100
2:REPLENIS 100*25
3. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens, and press the number corresponding
to the quantity and packsize you want to move from the REPLENIS location, and press
ENTER. You are prompted to enter the number of packs you want to remove for the first
pick bin location.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Packsize: 100
# Packs: 25
To Remove:
4. At the To Remove prompt, enter the number of packs which you want to move to the first
bin (you do not need to move the entire quantity to one bin), and press ENTER. If the
product is required for a work area, you are prompted to move the product to the
appropriate work area. Otherwise, if the product is stored in any bins currently, or if the
product is associated with a sticky bin, the first sequential bin in the system is displayed,
as well as the number of packs required.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Cartons:50
Locn:A3
Verify:
5. To continue, follow any of the methods described in Selecting the Bins to Fill on
page 144.
1 4 3
SELECTING THE BINS TO FILL
Once you have specified the product you are moving from the REPLENIS location, you have
several options for choosing the bin to which you want to move the products. You can use any
of the following methods:
If you know a valid bin to which you want to move the product, you can simply specify it.
For this option, follow the procedure in Specifying a Bin on page 144.
If the product is currently stored in a bin or bins, or your warehouse uses sticky homes,
you can simply move it to the first bin in which the system finds it (in sequential order).
For this option, follow the procedure in Selecting the First Sequential Bin on page 146.
If the product is currently stored in a bin or bins, or your warehouse uses sticky homes,
and you want to move it to one of the current or former homes, you can select the bin from
a list. For this option, follow the procedure in Selecting a Bin from a List on page 147.
PUT If you want to do a bin query to find the most suitable bin to which to move the product,
follow the procedure in Selecting a Bin by Bin Query on page 149.
SPECIFYING A BIN
If you know the bin to which you want to move the product, you can use this method to select
a bin to fill, regardless of whether the product is currently stored in that bin or not.
Note: Pick bins have restrictions on the products you can put into them based on their type.
For example, you cannot put two different products into a dedicated pick bin. For
warehouses that use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation, these
conditions impose additional restrictions on the products you can put into them. For
example, if your warehouse stores products using single homes, you cannot put a
> To move product to a specific bin:
1. Specify the product you want to move, as described in Selecting the Product to Move on
page 142.
2. Go to the bin you actually want, and at the Verify prompt, scan the bins barcode label, or
enter the bin number and press ENTER. If the product cannot be accepted in this bin, an
error message is displayed. Press ENTER to return to the previous screen, and enter a new
bin.
When your bin selection is successful, you are directed to move the product to the bin.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Packsize:25
#Packs:4
MOVE TO C1
4. Fill the bin with the selected quantity, and press ENTER. You are returned to the product
selection prompt.
5. If there are remaining quantities of this product, repeat the entire process, starting from
Selecting the Product to Move on page 142, for as much product as you need to move
by this method. When you have filled all replenishment requests for this product, the
message No Replenishment is displayed under the product selection prompt.
6. Press ENTER to return to the Overstock menu.
1 4 5
SELECTING THE FIRST SEQUENTIAL BIN
You can only use this method to select a bin to fill if the product is currently stored in a pick
bin, or if you are using sticky homes.
> To move product to the first sequential bin:
page 142.
bin (you do not need to move the entire quantity to one bin), and press ENTER. To accept
this bin, go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER.
You are prompted to move the product to the displayed bin.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Packsize:100
#Packs:50
MOVE TO A3
selection prompt.
4. If there are remaining quantities of the product, repeat the entire process, starting from
SELECTING A BIN FROM A LIST
You can only use this method to select a bin to fill if the product is currently stored in a pick
bin or if your warehouse uses sticky homes.
Note that this method displays all bins where the product is currently stored, including bins
with restrictions on them that may not allow you to move the product to that bin (for packsize
reasons, for example).
> To move product to a bin selected from a list:
page 142.
2. At the To Remove prompt, press [F2]. A list of bins where the product is currently stored,
or which are sticky homes for the product, is displayed. Optionally, to view additional
screens of bins, press ENTER.
LF408 1/1
Select:
1:A3 6*25
2:C2 8*25
3:B3 5*100
4:C1 2*100
press [F9]. Press ENTER to view additional screens of bins/dates, if necessary.
LF408 1/1
Location Date
1:A3 0207
2:C2 0207
3:B3 0207
4:C1 0207
1 4 7
4. To select a bin, scan the bins barcode label, or press the number corresponding to the bin
you want (this should be a pick bin) and press ENTER. The selected bin is displayed and
you are prompted to enter the number of packs you want to move to this bin.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Locn:B3
Packsize: 100
#Packs: 17
To Remove:
5. At the To Remove prompt, enter the number of packs which you want to move to this bin
(you do not need to move the entire quantity to a single bin), and press ENTER. You are
prompted to verify the bin.
PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Cartons:4
Locn:B3
Verify:
6. Go to the bin, and scan the bins barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER.
8. You are instructed to move the product to the bin.

PRODUCT> LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Packsize:100
#Packs:4
MOVE TO B3
selection prompt.
SELECTING A BIN BY BIN QUERY

PUT If your warehouse uses the directed putaway feature, you can find a bin to fill by doing a bin
query.
> To select a bin by searching for an appropriate bin:
page 142.
location (you do not need to move the entire quantity to one bin), and press ENTER. The
first sequential pick bin in which this product may be stored is displayed.
PRODUCT> LF522
Big Red
Cartons: 25
Locn: B4
Verify:
3. Press [F2], and continue by following any of the procedures in Finding Homes for
4. When you are returned to the Verify prompt, go to the bin you have selected, and scan the
bins barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER.
1 4 9
You are instructed to move the product to the bin.
PRODUCT> LF522
Big Red
Packsize: 100
# Packs: 25
MOVE TO B4
selection prompt.
5 KITTING AND PACKAGING

KIT
ABOUT THE KITTING AND PACKAGING

FUNCTIONS
Handheld kitting functions are used to process both kit orders and packaging orders. Kitting is
the process of assembling multiple products and packaging them into a single finished product.
Kitting is always performed in response to a work order being issued and allocated, either for
immediate shipment (in the case of a build-to-order order), or for inventory maintenance (in
the case of a build-to-stock order). There is also a function that lets you create build-to-stock
work orders on the handheld, as described in Entering Work Orders on page 167.
When kit orders are allocated, assembly labels are automatically printed, which show the work
area where the kits are to be built, the products, and quantities required to fill the work order.
Packaging is the process of splitting and/or repackaging a single product into different
PACK packsizes. Packaging is always performed in response to a packaging order being issued and
allocated. In some cases, the assembly labels for the packaging items are automatically printed
when a packaging order is allocated.
Sometimes it may be necessary to disassemble kits that were build in the warehouse using the
kitting function. This may happen if too many kits were built or if final products were returned
and you would rather keep components in stock, rather than assembled kits. Kits are
disassembled using the Reverse Kitting function as described in Disassembling Kits on
page 169.
1 5 1
UNDERSTANDING THE KITTING PROCESS
Once the components required to build kits or products to be repackaged have been moved to a
work area through the replenishment process (for more information, see Letting Down Stock
by Kit on page 139) or Direct Move, you can begin to build the kits or repackage the items,
without the need for the handheld. Once you have completed some or all of the kits/packaging
items, you use one, or both, of the following functions to record the number of kits built or
items repackaged:
Pull Kitting
This function allows you to enter a partial quantity of kits built or items repackaged.
Provided that the order is not a build-to-order kit order, you can keep the order open while
you continue to build additional kits or packaging items. Use this function if the kit-
building or packaging process will continue for several days, and you want to make the
finished kits or repackaged items available to inventory while you finish building the
remaining quantities required for the order. When you have finished assembling all the
kits or repackaged items, you can use this function or the Finish Kits function (described
below) to record the final quantity built and close the order. The Pull Kitting function is
described in Pulling Kits/Packaging Items on page 154.
Finish Kits
This function records the quantity of kits built or items packaged, and closes the order.
Use this function when you have finished building all the kits/packaging items, or have
built/packaged a partial quantity but know that no more will be built. The Finish Kits
function is described in Finishing Kits/Packaging Items on page 160.
When you are working with build-to-order kits, you cannot leave an order open once you have
recorded any built kits. Instead, you must complete the order (even if you have not built the
full quantity of kits) and immediately pick the finished goods into shipping cartons, as
described in Picking Build-to-Order Kits into Shipping Cartons on page 166. Thus, you can
use either the Pull Kitting or Finish Kits functions interchangeably.
1 5 2 CHAPTER 5 K I T T I N G A N D P A C K A G I N G
Once you have built build-to-stock kits or packaging items, they will immediately be placed in
a temporary system location (by default, this location is TRANS_FK). You will need to use the
Direct Move function, described in Moving Inventory on page 69, to move the newly-built
items into storage bins.
When you have closed out a work order, if any components are remaining in the work area, a
message may be displayed. If you want to return the leftover components to storage bins, you
can use the Direct Move function to do so. In some configurations, however, any remaining
component items are automatically adjusted out.
ACCESSING THE KITTING/PACKAGING FUNCTIONS

All of the functions described in this chapter are available through the Work Orders menu.
> To access the Work Orders menu:
From the main menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and
press the number corresponding to Work Orders. The Work Orders menu is displayed:.
WORK ORDERS 1/
1-Write Orders
2-Pull Kitting
3-Finish Kit
4-Reverse Kitting
Note: The options available in the Work Orders menu will depend on your permissions.
1 5 3
PULLING KITS/PACKAGING ITEMS

You can use the Pull Kits function to record partial or complete quantities of kits/packages
required for an order, and either leave the order open (provided that the order is not build-to-
order), or close it right away. Both options are described in the following procedure.
If your configuration allows it, you can also use this function to report extra kits that were not
originally ordered. Additionally, if allowed by your configuration, you can report quantities of
kits which the system believes that there are not enough components to build. In the following
procedure, these options are not described.
> To pull kits or repackaged items:
1. From the Work Orders menu, press the number corresponding to Pull Kitting. You are
prompted to enter the work order number for which you built the kits/packaging items.
PULL KITS
WorkOrder #:
Enter the order number and press ENTER. Press [F2] to display a list of work/
packaging orders that are ready to be built.
PULL KIT 1/1

WO#:
1:W-100
2:W-103
3:W-101
4:W-102
5:PACK0002

screens of orders, and press the number
corresponding to the order for which you
have built kits/packaging items.
If any quantities of built kits or repackaged items were recorded previously, they are
displayed, and you are prompted to enter the number of kits/repackaged items built since
then.
PULL KITS
Number of kits/packaging items built so far.
BIN: WORK1
WO#: W-100
Kit: LF1000 Total number of kits/packaging
Built: 0 of 400 items required for this order.
Qty:
Pack of 1
Unit(s)/Assembly
1 5 5
3. At the Qty prompt, enter the number of kits or packaging items that have been built and
press ENTER.
If the finished goods or repackaged items that you have built require a non-unique
ATT attribute, such as a lot number, you are prompted to enter it. Enter the attribute number for
this batch of kits/packaging items, and press ENTER.
If the kit/packaging item contains items with non-unique attributes, such as lot numbers,
ATT and there are items with more than one attribute number, you are prompted to identify the
lot number of the items you have pulled. Press the number corresponding to the lot
number you want to select and press ENTER, or scan the barcode label of one unit of the
product.
You are prompted to enter the quantity of the product with this attribute number that you
used.
Product with non-unique attributes.
The attribute number you selected. (If there is only a single

PULL KITS attribute number in this work area, that number will appear by
BIN: WORK1 default.)
WO#: W-100
Kit: LF408 The number of packs of the product with this attribute
LF408/3837 number in the work area.
Bin:200 Pld: 0
Need:50 (/1) The number of packs of the product with this attribute number
Qty (50): that have been pulled so far.
The total number of packs (and packsize) of the product that

are needed to pull the quantity of kits you entered in step 3.
Press ENTER to accept the full quantity, or enter the actual quantity you pulled and press
ENTER. If necessary, repeat this step for each different attribute number you have used.
You are prompted to select labels to print for the built kits.
PRODUCT LABEL
Kit: LF1000
# of Labels:
F7 - Product Labels
To print simple product labels, enter the To specify additional information for the
desired number of labels and press ENTER. product labels, such as the customer SKU
and packsize, press [F7].
PRODUCT LBLS
Product:
? >LF1000
Combo Pack
SKU #:
At the SKU# prompt, enter the customers

product number, or press ENTER to leave it
blank. If you are prompted to enter a
packsize and/or a number of packs (for
packaged/bagged goods), enter the desired
values at the prompts and press ENTER
each time. At the #Labels prompt, enter
the number of labels you want to print and
press ENTER.
1 5 7
If you entered a partial quantity of kits required for the order, the number built is
displayed, and a message is displayed that components are remaining in the work area.
PULL KITS
BIN: WORK1
WO#: W-100
Kit: LF1000
Built: 200.00 of
400.00
Some components left
in WORK1
Press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.
If this is a build-to-order kit, you are prompted to print carton labels.
PULL KITS
BIN: WORK1
WO#: W-100.001
Kit: LF1000 BUILD-TO
# of labels
to print:
Default = 1
Continue by following the procedure in Picking Build-to-Order Kits into Shipping

Cartons on page 166.
If you entered a quantity that totals the full quantity ordered, you are prompted to finish
the kits now, and close the order.
PULL KITS
BIN: WORK1
WO#: W-100
Kit: LF1000
Kit is completed
Do Finish Kit?
5. If this is not a build-to-order kit and you want to leave the order open, press N and you are
returned to the Work Orders menu. (Note that if you choose this option, you will not be
able to use the Pull Kitting function to close the order, but must use the Finish Kits
function to do so.) Press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.
Otherwise, press Y.
If any additional items are left in the work area (because more quantities than required to
fill the order were let down originally), a message is displayed.
PULL KITS
W-10O
Kit: LF1000
SOME ITEMS LEFT
IN:WORK1
PULL KITS
BIN: WORK1
WO#: W-100.001
# of labels
to print:
Default = 1

6. Otherwise, press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.
1 5 9
FINISHING KITS/PACKAGING ITEMS

You use the Finish Kits function to record partial or complete quantities of kits or packaged
items required for an order, and close it right away. If you expect to build additional kits or
packaged items for the order, do not use this function until all kits/packaged items are
complete; instead, use the Pull Kitting function to record the quantities built and leave the
order open.
> To finish kits/packaging items:
1. From the Work Orders menu, press the number corresponding to Finish Kits. You are
prompted to enter the order number for which you built the kits/packaged items.
FINISH KITS
WorkOrder #:
2. Enter the order number and press ENTER. If this is not a build-to-order order, and you
previously entered a full quantity with the Pull Kitting function, and any additional items
are left in the work area (because more quantities than required to fill the order were let
down originally), a message is displayed. (Otherwise, the message Kit is Completed is
displayed.)
FINISH KITS
W-103
Kit: LF1000
SOME ITEMS LEFT IN
WORK1
If your configuration allows it, you may be prompted to clear out/delete any remaining
items in the work area. When prompted, press Y to adjust out all items in the work area, or
N to leave the items in the work area.
Press ENTER. The original quantity ordered and the final quantity built are displayed.
FINISH KITS
BIN:WORK1
WO#:W-103
Kit:LF1000
Qty :500
Built: 50
Enter - Finish
Press ENTER. The order is closed and you are returned to the Work Orders menu.
Otherwise, the number of kits/packaging items that were previously reported is displayed.
(If this is a build-to-order order, or if you did not use the Pull Kitting function previously,
0 is displayed.) You are prompted to pull additional kits since the last quantity reported.
FINISH KITS
BIN: WORK1
WO#: W-103
Kit: LF1000
Built: 50 of 500
450 to Pull
Do a Final Pull
right now (Y/N)?
1 6 1
If this is the first time you are reporting If you do not want to report any kits built,
kits or packaging items built for this order, or additional kits/packaged items since the
or if additional kits/packaged items were last time the Pull Kitting function was run,
built since the last time the Pull Kitting press N. If any additional items are left in
function was run, press Y. You are the work area (because more quantities
prompted to enter the quantity of kits/ than required to fill the order were let
packaged items built. down originally), a message is displayed.
FINISH KITS FINISH KITS

BIN: WORK1 W-103
WO#: W-103 Kit: LF1000
Kit: LF1000 SOME ITEMS LEFT IN
Built: 50 of 500 WORK1
Qty:
Continue by following step 4. Press ENTER to continue. The original

quantity ordered, and the final quantity
built, are displayed.
FINISH KITS
BIN:WORK1
WO#:W-103
Kit:LF1000
Qty :500
Built: 50
Enter - Finish
Press ENTER. The order is closed and you

are returned to the Work Orders menu.
4. If you are reporting a quantity of kits built, at the Qty prompt, enter the quantity built and
press ENTER.
If the finished goods that you have built require a non-unique attribute, such as a lot
ATT number, you are prompted to enter it. Enter the attribute number for this batch of kits/
packaged items, and press ENTER.
If the kit/packaging item contains items with non-unique attributes, such as lot numbers,
ATT and there are items with more than one attribute number, you are prompted to identify the
lot number of the items you have pulled. Press the number corresponding to the lot
number you want to select and press ENTER, or scan the barcode label of one unit of the
product.
You are prompted to enter the quantity of the product with this attribute number that you
used.
Product with non-unique attributes.
The attribute number you selected. (If there is only a single

PULL KITS attribute number in this work area, that number will appear by
BIN: WORK1 default.)
WO#: W-100
Kit: LF408 The number of packs of the product with this attribute
LF408/3837 number in the work area.
Bin:200 Pld: 0
Need:50 (/1) The number of packs of the product with this attribute number
Qty (50): that have been pulled so far.
The total number of packs (and packsize) of the product that

are needed to pull the quantity of kits you entered in step 3.
Enter the quantity, or press ENTER to accept the full quantity, and press ENTER. If necessary,
repeat this step for each different attribute number you have used.
5. You are prompted to select labels to print for the built kits/packaged items.
PRODUCT LABEL
Kit: LF1000
# of Labels:
F7 - Product Labels
1 6 3
To print simple product labels, enter the To specify additional information for the
desired number of labels and press ENTER. product labels, such as the customer SKU
and packsize, press [F7].
PRODUCT LBLS
Product:
? >LF1000
Combo Pack
SKU #:
At the SKU# prompt, enter the customers

product number, or press ENTER to leave
it blank. If you are prompted to enter a
packsize and/or a number of packs (for
packaged or bagged goods), enter the
desired values at the prompts and press
ENTER each time. At the #Labels prompt,
enter the number of labels you want to
print and press ENTER.
The original quantity ordered, and the final quantity built, are displayed.
FINISH KITS
BIN: WORK1
WO#: W-103
Kit#:LF1000
Built: 50.00 of
500.00
7. Press ENTER. If your final quantity is less than the number of kits/packaged items ordered,
a message is displayed that components are remaining in the work area.
PULL KITS
BIN: WORK1
WO#: W-103.001
# of labels
to print:
Default = 1

Otherwise, a message is displayed confirming that the kits are complete, and the order is
closed.
FINISH KITS
BIN: WORK1
WO#: W-103
Kit#:LF1000
Kit is completed
8. Press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.
1 6 5
PICKING BUILD-TO-ORDER KITS INTO SHIPPING

CARTONS
When you report build-to-order kits through the Pull Kitting or Finish kits functions, you are
immediately prompted to pick the finished goods into shipping cartons. You will need to know
how many shipping cartons you will require to pack the finished goods.
> To pick finished goods into shipping cartons:
1. At the # of Labels to Print prompt, do one of the following:
If you only require a single shipping carton, press ENTER to print a single picking/
shipping label. Pack all the finished goods into the same carton, and collect your label
from the printer. Press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.
If you require more than one shipping carton, enter the number of cartons, and press
ENTER. You are prompted to scan the carton label of the first carton.
Carton:
Scan Carton
2. Scan or enter the carton number of the first picking/shipping label, and press ENTER. You
are prompted to enter the quantity of finished goods you will pack into this carton.
Carton:
100000014
Qty:
Packs of 1
3. Count the number of packs you are packing into this carton, enter the quantity, and press
ENTER.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each carton label you printed. When you are done, if any
additional items are left in the work area (because more quantities than required to fill the
order were let down originally), a message is displayed.
PULL KITS
W-10O
Kit: LF1000
SOME ITEMS LEFT
IN:WORK1
5. Press ENTER to return to the Work Orders menu.
ENTERING WORK ORDERS

If you have the appropriate permissions, you can use the Build Kits function to create a build-
to-stock work order for a kit that is defined in your database.
> To create a work order:
1. From the Work Orders menu, press the number corresponding to Write Orders. You are
prompted to enter a work order number for this work order.
BUILD-TO-STOCK
Workorder #
1 6 7
2. Enter a number for this work order, and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the kit
number for this work order.
BUILD-TO-STOCK
W-101
Kit:
3. At the Kit prompt, enter the product number for the kit and press ENTER. You are
prompted to enter the work area where the kits are to be built and temporarily stored.
BUILD-TO-STOCK
W-101
LF1000
Stage:
Pack of 1
Unit(s)/Assembly
4. At the Stage prompt, enter the work area location where the kits will be built and press
ENTER. If you enter a work area that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the work
area, press Y to add the work area or N not to add the work area. If you press N, you are
prompted to enter a new work area.
The number of available (unallocated) component units is displayed, and you are
prompted to enter the number of kits you want to build.
BUILD-TO-STOCK
W-101
LF1000
Stage:WORK1
Avail: 7800
Build?
* APPROX!!*
5. At the Build? prompt, enter the number of kits to be built for this work order, and press
ENTER. The order is created, and can now be allocated.
BUILD-TO-STOCK
W-101
To Build: 100
of Kit
LF1000
Workshp:WORK1
Created
Press ENTER. You are returned to the Work Order prompt screen, where you can create another
work order or press [F1] to return to the Work Orders menu.
DISASSEMBLING KITS
The Reverse Kitting function is used to disassemble final products built from kits in the
warehouse. Reverse kitting is useful if, for example, too many kits were built or if final
products were returned, and you would rather keep components in stock, instead of assembled
kits.
The warehouse staff disassembles the kit into its component items and quantities, according to
the products and quantities that were used to fill the work order when it was built. The Reverse
Kitting function can only be used to disassemble all of the kits that were built on the work
orderyou cannot disassemble less than the number of kits that were built. For example, if
five kits were built for a work order, all five kits will be disassembled by reverse kitting; it is
not possible to reverse only three kits from the order.
ATT Components attributes (serial numbers and lots), if applicable, are captured when the kit(s) are
disassembled.
When disassembling a final product, all the components are put into a single destination work
area (bin). The warehouse staff can use the direct move function later, if necessary to find
different bins for all or some of the components.
1 6 9
> To disassemble kits:
1. From the Work Orders menu, press the number corresponding to Reverse Kitting. You
are prompted to enter the number of the work order that you want to disassemble.
REVERSE KIT
Enter Work Order:
2. At the Enter Work Order prompt, enter the work order that was originally used to build
the kit that you want to disassemble. The kit associated with the work order is displayed
for verification.
Order:
W-101
Kit:
LF1000
Enter - Continue
3. Press ENTER to confirm the that this is the kit you want to disassemble. You are prompted
to enter the work area where the kit to be disassembled is located.
REVERSE KIT
LF1000
Enter Work Order:
Enter the bin and press ENTER. Press [F2] to display a list of bins
containing the kit.
PULL KIT 1/1

WO#:
1:W-100
2:W-103
3:W-101
4:W-102
5:PACK0002

screens of bins, and press the number
corresponding to the bin from which you
want to select the kit to be disassembled.
5. A message displays that the kit has been disassembled. The components are put in the
same work area in which the kit is dissambled.To move the components to other bins in
the warehouse, see Moving Inventory on page 69.
6. Press ENTER. You are returned to the Enter Work Order prompt on the Reverse Kit
screen, where you can disassemble another kit, or press [F1] to return to the Work Orders
menu.
1 7 1
6 PICKING AND PACKING

ORDERS
ABOUT PICKING AND PACKING SALES ORDERS

Picking is the act of removing products from bins. Packing is the act of putting these products
into cartons or totes for shipping. Depending on the picking styles used in the warehouse,
picking and packing are often done simultaneously. The various picking and packing processes
available are documented in this chapter starting with Understanding Picking and Packing
on page 174.
If your warehouse uses license plates, license plates can be part of the picking process. After
reading this chapter, refer to Picking an Order Using License Plates on page 386.
Occasionally, you may need to remove items from an order that is completely picked and ready
to be shipped. The Unpick function lets you take items out of an order and return those items to
stock. Described in Unpicking an Order on page 209.
Another special circumstance that may arise involves the need to create orders on-the-fly for
front-counter orders, or emergency orders which you do not want to process through the
normal RADIO BEACON WMS system. The Sales Order by Walking function lets you create
and process sales orders completely on the handheld. Described in Entering Sales Orders on
page 211.
1 7 3
UNDERSTANDING PICKING AND PACKING

Picking is the act of removing products from bins. Packing is the act of putting these products
into cartons or totes for shipping. In RADIO BEACON WMSs most common picking style,
these two processes are combined.
In a RADIO BEACON warehouse, you rarely pick one order at a time; instead, you pick orders in
waves, or groups of orders. The system finds the most efficient way for you to collect all the
products you need for all the orders in the wave, so you walk through the warehouse only once,
and never need to return to the same bin twice.
Although there are many different picking styles used in a RADIO BEACON warehouse (these
are described in Understanding Picking Styles on page 175), the picking process essentially
consists of the following steps:
ZONE 1. If your warehouse uses multiple zones, select a zone or zones in which you will pick
orders. This procedure is described in Selecting a Picking Zone on page 181.
2. Identify a wave of sales orders which you want to pick. There are various methods by
which you can create, start or restart a wave of sales orders; all are described in Starting a
Wave of Sales Orders on page 180.
3. Select a picking mode, go to the bin to which the system directs you (if the selected mode
does so), and pick the product required for the orders in your wave. Selecting a picking
mode and picking products are described in Picking Orders on page 191.
4. Repeat the process until your wave is complete.
The actual steps you follow in picking may vary from warehouse to warehouse, depending on
your configuration, and you may be prompted to enter or validate other information, pertaining
to shipping cartons, cubage, quantity of product, and so on.
Furthermore, your warehouse will have a policy for dealing with over-picking or short-
picking, and your system will be configured accordingly. In the procedures given in this
chapter, overpicking is not allowed, and the only additional options that are described are
skipping and shorting picks (see Handling Picks You Cannot Fulfill on page 206).
1 7 4 CHAPTER 6 P I C K I N G A N D P A C K I N G O R D E R S
UNDERSTANDING PICKING STYLES
When a wave of sales orders is created, RADIO BEACON WMS generates a picking path, or
route, through the warehouse. By default, the pick path follows the sequence of bins from
lowest zone to highest zone (if multiple zones are used in your system and are included in the
wave), and from lowest bin number to highest number. In this way, you only need to visit a
single bin once and collect as much product as is required from each bin to fulfill all the orders
in the wave.
In the most common method of picking, known as regular/wave picking, you are directed to
each bin in sequence, and told the product, packsize and quantity to pick. You pick the required
product, and scan its barcode label. You are then told the carton number into which to pack the
product. You place the items into this carton, and scan the picking/shipping label for that
carton. Finally, you enter the quantity of product you picked. You are then directed to the next
pick, and the process is repeated, until you have picked and packed all orders in your wave.
Although RADIO BEACON WMS supports many other styles of picking, all are variations of
this basic process, and only really differ from the default wave picking style, in the following
parameters:
The number of steps, and the sequence in which they are performed.
The sequence of picks in the wave (forward or reverse).
The number of different people who are involved in picking a single order.
ZONE
The number of different zones in which different pickers may work.
The following matrix lists some of the most popular picking styles, and distinguishes between
each one in terms of these different parameters. Note also that virtually all of these basic styles
can be combined with each other to create additional styles. Following the matrix table, a brief
description is given of each style, the contexts in which it is typically used, and how it is
performed.
1 7 5
Style Different Different Multiple Multiple Pickers Pickers Requires

step bin pickers pickers must can restart
sequence sequence on the on the work in wave of wave
same same particular orders
order order at zones
the
same
time
Batch yes no yes yes no yes no

picking
Product yes yes yes yes no yes no

picking
Scanner yes yes yes yes no yes no

picking
Reverse no yes yes or no yes no yes no

picking
Pick-and- no no yes no no yes yes

pass
picking
Sequen- no no yes no yes yes yes

ZONE tial zone
picking
Simulta- no no yes yes yes no no

neous
ZONE
zone
picking
Note: In all picking styles, more than one picker cannot pick the same product from the
same bin at the same time. This also applies to product picking (see below), in which
all products are in the BATCHPCK location.
BATCH PICKING
This method allows you to collect all the products required in a wave before packing them into
cartons. For each pick, you are guided to the pick bin, and told the product and quantity to
pick, but not the cartons into which to pack the items. Instead, you place the products onto a
cart or into totes, and bring them to a sorting area, where you then pack them into cartons for
the appropriate orders.
This method of picking is particularly well suited to a warehouse layout that is not conducive
to bringing cartons through aisles of pick bins. It is also an efficient way to pick a large number
of orders (each with a few lines), as it lets you split the picking and packing functions between
two people.
To pick by batch, after starting a wave, you simply select the Batch Picking mode from within
the Pick & Pack function. For details, see Picking Orders by Batch on page 196. Once you
have picked the items, you or another picker have the option of packing the items by product
(see Product Picking below), by order (see Reverse Picking on page 179), or in the same
sequence in which the products were pulled off the shelves.
PRODUCT PICKING
This method is typically (although not required to be) used in conjunction with batch picking,
as it allows you to select the products you want to pick, usually from a previously-picked
collection of items, and pack them in the sequence that you choose, rather than in the sequence
of bins. In this method, you identify the product to pack, and the system prompts you with the
quantities and cartons required for each order in the wave.
Again, this method is typically used in warehouses where it is not feasible to bring cartons
through aisles, or in which it is more efficient to split up picking and packing functions
between two or more people. It can also used to allow experienced pickers to pack orders
correctly the first time (for example, by packing the largest items at the bottom of the cartons,
etc.) without having to re-pack them later.
To pick by product, you typically restart a wave that has already been batch picked (for
information, see Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave on page 188), and then simply
select the Product Picking mode from within the Pick & Pack function. For details, see
Picking Orders by Product on page 199.
1 7 7
SCANNER PICKING
This method, also referred to as supermarket picking, is similar to product picking, but
requires that you scan each product unit before packing it and picking the next product.
This method is typically (although not required to be) used in conjunction with batch picking,
as it allows you to select the products you want to pick, usually from a previously-picked
collection of items, and scan each product/packsize (quantity of one unit per scan) as you put
them in the carton. This is similar to a supermarket check-out line, where each individual
product in the order is scanned separately.
To scanner pick, you might typically use a procedure whereby you restart a wave that has
already been batch picked (for information, see Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave on
page 188). Then, select the Scanner Picking mode from within the Pick & Pack function. For
details, see Picking Orders by Scanning Each Unit on page 202.
PICK-AND-PASS PICKING
Pick-and-pass picking allows orders to be split up between several pickers, and can be useful
in large-volume orders that require multiple cartons. In this method, one picker picks all the
products in a wave in one area of the warehouse, such as an aisle, and hands off the rest of the
wave to the next picker in another area of the warehouse. This method can be used to divide
aisles of bins up so that individual pickers only work in a specified number of aisles. They can
pick each aisle sequentially, or if they want to pick simultaneously, can start at opposite ends of
ZONE an area and meet in the middle (see Reverse Picking on page 179). Typically, to pick
multiple aisles simultaneously, the aisles are split up into different zones (see Zone Picking
on page 179).
To pick-and-pass, you restart a wave that has already been started by the first picker (for
information, see Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave on page 188), skip the picks that
are not in your area if you are picking multiple aisles simultaneously (for information, see
Skipping a Pick on page 207), and pick your areas, until all the products in all the orders are
picked. You can use any number of picking modes, such as regular, batch, or product picking
in a pick-and-pass process.
ZONE PICKING
There are two basic styles of zone picking supported by RADIO BEACON WMS:
ZONE
Sequential zone picking In this method, one picker picks part of an order in one zone at
one time and passes the partially filled cartons from zone to zone, as in pick-and-pass
described above.
Simultaneous zone picking In this method, pickers in multiple zones work on the same
order at the same time. The cartons are then consolidated and re-packed when all zones
have been completed. Simultaneous zone picking can prevent the problem of slowdowns
in picking because of hold-ups in a particular zone or in the packing area.
To zone pick, you specify only the zones in which you will pick orders, as described in
Selecting a Picking Zone on page 181. If you are sequential zone picking, you typically
restart a wave that has already been picked in another zone (for information, see Stopping and
Restarting a Pick or Wave on page 188). For all zone picking techniques, you can use any
mode, such as regular, or batch picking.
REVERSE PICKING
Picking in reverse is also not really a style of picking, but a variation in the sequencing of the
wave. That is, rather than proceeding in zone and bin sequence from lowest to highest zone,
and lowest to highest bin, the system guides you to picks from highest zone to lowest zone,
and highest bin to lowest bin. This mode is typically used to have two pickers simultaneously
pick a single wave: one picker uses forward picking to start at the lowest zone and bin, while
the other picker uses reverse picking to start at the highest zone and bin. The two meet in the
middle when they are finished.
To pick in reverse, you typically restart a wave that has been started by a forward picker (for
information, see Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave on page 188), and then simply
select the Reverse Picking mode from within the Pick & Pack function. For details, see
Understanding and Selecting Picking Modes on page 192. Again, you can combine this
mode with any other technique, including regular wave picking, and batch picking.
1 7 9
OTHER PICKING STYLES
Additional picking styles that may be used in your warehouse include:
Shortcut picking This method allows you to skip entering a quantity picked for a
product, but immediately scan the product for the next pick instead. This type of picking is
usually only permitted for expert pickers, who are assigned a special type of user ID. As
this picking style requires special configuration, it is not documented in this manual.
One-scan picking This method allows you to pick items directly into a single carton or
multiple cartons and simply scan a single carton, without scanning or entering any other
information. This is an extreme picking style that is only used in rare situations, such as
rush periods where picking speed is more important than accuracy. One-scan picking is
described in Picking Orders in One Scan on page 205.
Full-case picking This method allows you to pick a full case of products without a
handheld, and have the carton scanned in the shipping area with the Carton Shipping
function (see Processing Shipping Cartons on page 240). To full-case pick, your system
must be configured to allocate products from bins in which bulk quantities are stored, and
to print one pick ticket for each unit to pick.
STARTING A WAVE OF SALES ORDERS

To begin picking orders, you must first identify the wave you want to pick. Even if you are
picking a single order, it still must be part of a wave before you can pick it. To start a wave, you
use the following steps:
Select the zone in which you want to pick orders. For instructions, see Selecting a Picking
Zone on page 181.
Start a wave by using one of the following methods:
If orders have already been waved out by a dispatcher, and your system is configured to
allow you to restart waves automatically, you can scan the picking/shipping labels for the
orders that have been assigned to you, or enter the wave number. To use either of these
methods, follow the instructions in Starting a Dispatcher- or System-Waved Wave on
page 183.
If orders have already been waved out by a dispatcher, and your system is configured to
force you to manually restart waves, you need to restart the wave. Follow the instructions
in Stopping and Restarting a Pick or Wave on page 188.
If orders have not been waved out by a dispatcher, and your system is configured to allow
picker waving, you can create the wave from orders that are ready to wave. To use this
method, follow the instructions in Creating a Wave from the Handheld on page 185.
Your system may be configured to limit your waves to a single order; in the following
procedures, multiple-order waves are described.
SELECTING A PICKING ZONE
ZONE If your warehouse uses multiple zones, you may be prompted to select the zone in which you
want to pick.
> To select the picking zone:
1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Pick & Pack. From the Picking
Menu, press 1 to select Picking. You are prompted to enter the zone(s) from which you
want to pick.
PICK
Zone:
F9 for all zones
1 8 1

If you are using a zone-based picking If you are not using a zone-based picking
style, such as sequential or simultaneous style, or may pick from all zones, press
zone picking, enter the letter(s) and/or [F9].
number(s) of the zone(s) from which you
want to pick, and press ENTER. To enter
more than one zone, simply key in all the
letters and/or numbers, with no spaces
between them.
The Wave Information screen is displayed, with all totals at 0 to begin.
F2-START
Wave Information
Ordrs: 0
Lines: 0 0
Units: 0 0
Cube : 0 0
3. To continue, use one of the following procedures:
To start a wave that has already been waved out by the dispatcher, or by the system,
see Starting a Dispatcher- or System-Waved Wave on page 183.
To restart a wave that has already been waved or partially picked, see Stopping and
Restarting a Pick or Wave on page 188.
To create a new wave from the handheld (if your system is configured for picker
waving), see Creating a Wave from the Handheld on page 185.
STARTING A DISPATCHER- OR SYSTEM-WAVED WAVE
You can start an already-created wave by doing either of the following:
Scanning the picking/shipping label of a carton in each order in the wave. In this way you
are actually re-creating your wave by specifying the orders you actually want to pick now.
To use this method, follow the procedure in Starting a Wave by Scanning Picking/
Shipping Labels below.
Entering the wave number. This method forces you to pick all the orders in the wave. To
use this method, follow the procedure in Starting a Wave by Entering the Wave Number
on page 185.
To begin a wave from an already-waved out set of orders, you should have collected picking/
shipping labels for the orders, as you will need to scan the barcode number on the labels to
identify the orders and/or cartons to the system.
STARTING A WAVE BY SCANNING PICKING/SHIPPING

LABELS
> To add orders to an already-generated wave:
1. From the Wave Information screen, scan a picking/shipping label for an order. If any
special instructions are defined for the order, they are displayed, and you are prompted to
confirm.
2. Press Y to confirm that you have or will perform the required processes, or press N to
cancel adding the order to your wave. If you pressed Y, the order is automatically added to
the wave.
1 8 3
The number of orders added to the wave so far are displayed in the right column, and the
left column displays totals for the wave so far in all zones. The right column displays the
lines, units, and cube for either the current order, or for the entire wave in the selected
zone, depending on how your system is configured. In the example below, only totals for
the order itself are displayed.
F2-Start
Wave Information Total number of orders added to the wave so far.
Ordrs 1 Totals in the wave so far for all zones.

Lines : 2 2
Units : 15 15
Cube : 420 420
Totals in this order.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each sales order you want to add to your wave. If your system is
configured to show wave totals in the right column, the total lines, units and cube are
increased in the right column of the Wave Information screen for each order you add.
4. When you have added all orders to your wave and are ready to begin picking, press [F2].
The first pick in the wave is displayed. (If your system is configured to do so, the next
pick in the wave may also be displayed.)
Quantity and packsize to pick.

8 PACKS OF 25
BIN :A4 Bin for this pick.
LF522 Product to pick.

Big Red
8 Quantity to pick.
5. Begin to pick the wave by following any of the procedures in Picking Orders on
page 191
STARTING A WAVE BY ENTERING THE WAVE NUMBER
> To start an already-generated wave:
1. From the Wave Information screen, enter the wave number. All of the orders in the wave
are automatically added to your wave, and the first pick in the wave is displayed. (If your
system is configured to do so, the next pick in the wave may also be displayed.)

8 PACKS OF 25

Big Red
8 Quantity to pick.
2. Begin to pick the wave by following any of the procedures in Picking Orders on
page 191
CREATING A WAVE FROM THE HANDHELD
You can only create a wave of orders from the handheld if your system is configured to allow
picker waving, and no one else has waved out the orders. For each order you add to your wave,
a picking/shipping label is automatically printed.
You can create a wave in two ways:
By scanning or entering a packslip, or sales order, number. To do so, you will need printed
order information, such as a pre-packslip label.
By selecting the next available order from the system. Normally, you must select orders in
a predetermined sequence, based on the priority, date and time required, and other criteria
specified in the order itself.
1 8 5
Both methods are described in the following procedure.
Note: If you are using simultaneous zone picking, you should not use the handheld to create
ZONE waves of orders for this style of picking unless you are the first picker to work with
the orders.
> To create a wave of sales orders:
1. From the Wave Information screen, add an order to the wave, by doing one of the
following:
At the F2-Start prompt, scan or enter the packslip (sales order) number of the order
you want to add, and press ENTER.
To select the highest priority ready to wave order from the system, press ENTER or
[F4].
If the order you entered is not ready to wave, or there are no ready to wave orders, the
message None Left is displayed. If your order is valid, or there are other ready to wave
orders, the order details (lines, units, and cube) are displayed, and you are prompted to
confirm that you want to add this order to your wave.
Sales order or packslip number.

CONFIRM(Y/N)
198 Customer.
Ho Hos Good Time
102 Rock River Rd. Totals for this order.
Lines : 1 1
Units : 8 8 Totals in the wave so far.
Cube : 224 224

To accept this order in To accept this order in To reject this order from
your wave and print a your wave and specify the your wave, press N. You
single picking/shipping number of labels you are returned to the Wave
label, press Y. want, press [F7], and at the Information screen, unless
# Labels prompt, enter order shopping is enabled,
the number of labels you and you are selecting
want to print. orders from the system. In
this case, the next order is
displayed, for you to
accept or reject.
If you accepted the order, if any special instructions are defined for the order, they are
displayed, and you are prompted to confirm.
3. Press Y to confirm that you have or will perform the required processes, or press N to
cancel adding the order to your wave. If you pressed Y, picking/shipping labels are printed
for this order, and the order is added to the wave.
The number of orders added to the wave so far are displayed in the right column, and the
left column displays totals for the wave so far in all zones. The right column displays the
lines, units, and cube for either the current order, or for the entire wave in the selected
zone, depending on how your system is configured. In the example below, only totals for
the order itself are displayed.
F2-Start
Total number of orders added to the wave so far.
Wave Information
Ordrs 1 Totals in the wave so far for all zones.

Lines : 1 1
Units : 8 8
Totals in this order.
Cube : 420 420
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each sales order you want to add to your wave. The total lines, units
and cube are increased in the right column of the Wave Information screen for each order
you add.
1 8 7
5. When you want to begin picking the wave, or there are no more ready to wave orders in
the system and the message None Left is displayed, press [F2] to begin picking. The first
pick in the wave is displayed. (If your system is configured to do so, the next pick in the
wave may also be displayed.)

8 PACKS OF 25

Big Red
8
Quantity of product to pick.
6. Collect your picking/shipping labels from the appropriate printer, and begin to pick the
wave by following any of the procedures in Picking Orders on page 191.
STOPPING AND RESTARTING A PICK OR WAVE
While picking a wave of orders, you may need to stop and/or restart a pick or a wave to correct
a pick, to pick the same wave as other pickers, either in sequence or simultaneously, or simply
to take a break from your work. You also need to restart a new wave if your system is
configured to force a manual restart for orders that have already been waved by the system or
by a dispatcher.
To stop a wave, see Stopping a Wave below.
To restart a wave, see Restarting a Wave on page 190.
STOPPING A WAVE
> To stop a wave:
1. Press [F1] at any point during a wave. If you have picked any lines in the wave, and your
system is configured to do so, you are prompted to redo the last pick.
BDG WAVE: 1005

Interrupted! Redo?
LF311
Juicy Fruit
100000012 300
To redo the pick, press Y, and you are redirected to this pick.
To leave the last pick as is, press N, and you are directed to the next pick.
To exit the wave, press [F1] again. You are prompted to assemble the next wave.
End of Wave
Assemble next
wave ?
Press Y to begin a new wave, or restart the one you stopped, or press N to return to the
main menu.
1 8 9
RESTARTING A WAVE
> To restart a wave:
1. From the Wave Information screen, do one of the following:

If your system is configured to allow If your system is not configured to allow
automatic wave restart, scan a picking/ automatic wave restart, press [F3]. You are
shipping label for any order in the wave. prompted to enter an order number or
carton number for one of the orders in the
wave.
WAVE RESTART
Enter wave # or a
carton or PO from
the wave.
Scan a picking/shipping label for any

order in the wave, or enter the sales order
number, and press ENTER. If the wave does
not contain any previously picked lines,
you are directed to the first pick.
If any lines have already been picked in the wave, and your system is configured to do so,
you are prompted to redo the last pick.
BDG WAVE: 1005

Interrupted! Redo?
LF311
Juicy Fruit
100000012 300
Yes/No
Do one of the following:
To leave the last pick as is, press N, and you are directed to the next pick in the wave.
2. Continue by following any of the picking methods described in Picking Orders below.
PICKING ORDERS
Once you have started a wave of orders, you can simply begin to pick it if you are using the
default regular wave picking style, as described in Picking Orders by Wave (Regular
Picking) on page 193. However, if you are using other styles or techniques, you need to select
the appropriate picking modes in which to pick, as described in the following section.
You may also print additional picking/shipping labels at any time during picking (except when
prompted for a quantity).
Note: During picking, you may receive various other validation prompts that are not
described in the following procedures.
1 9 1
UNDERSTANDING AND SELECTING PICKING MODES
Once you have created a wave of orders, the default regular wave picking style is presented.
However, you can use the following function keys to toggle between different picking modes,
even in the middle of the same wave.
Function Key Toggles between...
[F4] Batch picking and regular picking
[F9] Product picking and regular picking
[F5] Reverse picking and forward picking
[F8] Scanner picking and regular picking
Regular picking, batch picking, scanner picking and product picking involve different steps in
the picking process. The forward/reverse picking modes merely determine the direction in
which picks proceed in forward zone/bin sequence, or in reverse zone/bin sequence. Thus,
you can actually combine regular/batch picking with forward/reverse picking as follows
(assuming you are starting from the default):
To combine In this Press these keys (in

this style... Direction... any order):
Regular Forward none
Reverse [F5]
Batch Forward [F4]
Reverse [F4][F5]
To use the regular picking steps, follow the procedure in Picking Orders by Wave (Regular
Picking) on page 193.
To use the batch picking steps, follow the procedure in Picking Orders by Batch on
page 196.
To use the product picking steps, follow the procedure in Picking Orders by Product on
page 199. (Product picking can not be combined with reverse picking, because you are not
guided by the system; rather, you select the products you want to pick in the sequence you
want.)
To use the scanner picking steps, follow the procedure in Picking Orders by Scanning Each
Unit on page 202. (Scanner picking can not be combined with reverse picking, because you
are not guided by the system; rather, you select the products you want to pick in the sequence
you want.)
To pick in reverse, press [F5] and follow the procedure in either Picking Orders by Wave
(Regular Picking) on page 193 or Picking Orders by Batch on page 196. To return to
forward picking, press [F5] again.
PICKING ORDERS BY WAVE (REGULAR PICKING)
For regular picking, you will need the picking/shipping labels for all your orders in your wave,
as well as the appropriate number of shipping cartons in which to pack the products for each
order.
If you want to pick your wave in reverse zone/bin sequence, optionally press [F5].
> To pick a wave of sales orders:
1. From the first picking screen, go to the bin displayed, and if your system requires that you
confirm the bin, scan the bins barcode label.
Note: If you cannot fulfill this pick for any reason, see Handling Picks You Cannot Fulfill
on page 206 for different ways of handling picks you cannot complete.
2. Optionally, if you need an additional carton and want to print a new label, press [F7].
1 9 3
3. Remove the quantity of the requested product, and scan the products barcode label to
verify that you have picked the correct product, or if your system allows you to simply
scan the bin (for dedicated bins only), scan the bins barcode label.
If any special instructions are defined for the product, they are displayed. Press ENTER to
continue.
The carton/order for which this product is required is displayed.
Product picked.
Big number appearing on picking/shipping label for
PRODUCT> LF522
this pick.
8*1>100000150( 3)
Carton: Carton number appearing on picking/shipping
label for this pick.
Ho Hos Good Time
Quantity to pick.
102 Rock River Rd.
Customer for this pick.
To view a list of cartons and their carton numbers for this order, press [F4]. If you
select a carton from the list, you are prompted to scan the selected carton.
To view special instructions for this order, press [F5]. If any instructions have been
included for this order, they are displayed. When finished, press ENTER to return to the
carton scanning screen.
To print a baggie label for this product, press [F8].
5. Place the product into the appropriate carton or box according to the big number or carton
number, and scan the barcode on the picking/shipping label.
unit you are picking.
Otherwise, if you are picking more than one unit/packsize, or if this product is needed for
more than one order, you are prompted to enter the quantity that you picked.
PRODUCT> LF522
8>100000150
Quantity:
100000150
Note: If you are picking more than one order, your waves will have more than one carton.
Take special care to ensure that you pack each product into the correct carton for the
correct order.
6. Enter the quantity that you picked and press ENTER. If you enter a quantity greater than
required, you may receive a warning, or you may be required to re-enter the quantity until
it matches the expected number. If you enter a quantity less than required, you are
prompted to re-enter the remaining quantity. If you are allowed to short the pick, you may
do so by following the instructions in Shorting a Pick on page 207. When your quantity
is accepted, the next pick is displayed.
7. If you are picking the same product for more than one order in your wave, repeat steps 2 to
6 until you have picked and packed the product for all orders in the wave.
1 9 5
8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until you have picked and packed all lines in the wave, and the End of
Wave message is displayed. You are prompted to start picking another wave.
End of Wave
Assemble next
wave ? Yes/No
9. Press Y if you want to start picking another wave; otherwise, press N and you are returned
to the main menu.
PICKING ORDERS BY BATCH
You can use batch pick labels or none at all to batch pick a wave of sales orders. When
you batch pick, all items in the wave are moved to a temporary system location BATCHPCK.
Once the products are picked to the BATCHPCK location, you (or other warehouse personnel)
can use either regular picking, product picking or scanner picking modes to pack the products
into shipping cartons. When you pack the batch-picked products into shipping cartons, you are
actually picking all the products from the BATCHPCK location.
If you want to batch pick your wave in reverse zone/bin sequence, optionally press [F5].
ATT Note: You can not use batch picking for orders with products with unique attributes, such as
serial numbers.
> To batch-pick a wave of sales orders:
1. From the first pick screen, press [F4] to begin a batch pick. The message BATCH PICK is
displayed at the bottom of the screen.

8 PACKS OF 25
LF522
Big Red Product to pick.
8
Quantity of product to pick.
BATCH PICK
2. Go to the bin displayed, and if your system requires that you confirm the bin, scan the
bins barcode label.
3. Remove the quantity of the requested product, and scan the products barcode label to
verify that you have picked the correct product, or if your system allows you to simply
scan the bin (for dedicated bins only), scan the bins barcode label.
If your system requires that you confirm the quantity that you actually picked, enter the
quantity and press ENTER. The next pick is displayed.
1 9 7
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each product in your wave. When you have completed the
remaining lines in the wave, RADIO BEACON WMS switches to regular picking so you can
pack the products you have picked.
PICKING
There are no
more items to be
Batch Picked.
Changing to
Regular Picking.
5. Press ENTER. You are returned to the first picking screen.
If you want to pack the products you have picked in the sequence you choose, follow
the procedure in Picking Orders by Product on page 199.
If you want to pack the products you have picked by scanning each product unit
separately, follow the procedure in Picking Orders by Scanning Each Unit on
page 202.
If you want to pack the products in the sequence in which the system directs you,
press ENTER, and follow the procedure in Picking Orders by Wave (Regular
Picking) on page 193.
PICKING ORDERS BY PRODUCT
For product picking, you will need the picking/shipping labels for all your orders in your wave,
as well as the appropriate number of shipping cartons for packing the products for each order.
ATT Note: You can not use product picking for orders with products with attributes, such as lot
or serial numbers.
> To product-pick a wave of sales orders:
1. From the first picking screen, press [F9] to start a product pick. The Product Picking
screen is displayed
* PRODUCT PICKING *
3 Picks Remain
Scan Item:
F7: New Label
2. Each time the Product Picking screen is displayed, it is updated with the number of
remaining picks.
1 9 9
4. Scan the barcode label of the product that you want to pick, or enter the product number
and press ENTER. If this product is required for your wave, the carton/order for which this
product is required is displayed.
Product picked.
Big number appearing on picking/shipping
PRODUCT> LF551
label for this pick.
8*1>100000004 (3)
Carton: Carton number appearing on picking/
shipping label for this pick.
The Candy Man
Quantity to pick.
200 Grape St. Customer for this pick.
To view a list of cartons and their carton numbers for this order, press [F4]. If you
select a carton from the list, you are prompted to scan the selected carton.
To view special instructions for this order, press [F5]. If any instructions have been
included for this order, they are displayed. When finished, press ENTER to return to the
carton scanning screen.
To print a baggie label for this product, press [F8].
6. Place the product into the appropriate carton or box according to the big number or carton
number, and scan the barcode on the picking/shipping label.
If you are picking more than one unit/packsize, or if this product is needed for more than
one order, you are prompted to enter the quantity that you picked.
PRODUCT> LF522
8>100000150
Quantity:
100000150
Take special care to ensure that you pack each product into the correct carton for the
correct order.
7. Enter the quantity that you picked and press ENTER, or press [F8] for the full quantity
ordered. If you enter a quantity greater than required, you may receive a warning, or you
may be required to re-enter the quantity until it matches the expected number. If you enter
a quantity less than required, you are prompted to re-enter the remaining quantity. If you
are allowed to short the pick, you may do so by following the instructions in Shorting a
Pick on page 207. When your quantity is accepted, you are prompted to select another
product.
2 0 1
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 until you have picked all lines in the wave, and the End of Wave
message is displayed. You are prompted to start picking another wave.
End of Wave
Assemble next
wave ? Yes/No
to the main menu.
PICKING ORDERS BY SCANNING EACH UNIT
For scanner picking, you will need the picking/shipping labels for all your orders in your wave,
as well as the appropriate number of shipping cartons for packing the products for each order.
Using scanner picking, you scan each item individually (like in a supermarket).
ATT Note: You can not use scanner picking for orders with products with attributes, such as lot
or serial numbers.
> To scanner-pick a wave of sales orders:
1. From the first picking screen, press [F8] to start scanner pick. The Scanner Picking screen
is displayed.
SCANNER PICKING
Carton>
Carton:
Scan carton
Enter - accept
2. Scan the barcode on the picking/shipping label. and you are prompted to scan the first
item.
SCANNER PICKING
Carton>100000117
Scan Item:
F6: Show Remainder

F7: New Label
F8: Remainder Label
4. Scan the barcode label of the product that you want to pick, or enter the product number
and press ENTER.
Place the item into the appropriate carton or box according to the big number or carton.
Take special care to ensure that you pack each item into the correct carton for the
correct order.
Since each unit of the product is scanned individually, after each scan, the number of units
scanned so far and the number of units remaining for the carton are updated
LF407
Bin: A104
2>100000117 (94)
Packsize:1
Scanned 4 of 6
LIfesaver Winteogreen
2 0 3
5. Optionally, press [F8] to print a list of the remaining items, or press [F6] to show the list of
the remaining item and their current bin picking location on the screen.
PICK REMAIN 1/2

1: LF407 A104
2: LF407 A104
3: LF211 A107
4: LF312 A107
5: LF312 A107
6: LF312 A107
Press ENTER until you are returned to the Scanner Picking screen.
6. Optionally, you can view:
A list of cartons and their carton numbers for this order press [F4]. If you select a
carton from the list, you are prompted to scan the selected carton.
Special instructions for this order,press [F5]. If any instructions have been included
for this order, they are displayed. When finished, press ENTER to return to the carton
scanning screen.
7. Continue scanning items until you have scanned the entire quantity required for this
product. You are prompted to select another product.
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until you have picked all lines in the wave, and the End of Wave
message is displayed. You are prompted to start picking another wave.
End of Wave
Assemble next
wave ? Yes/No
to the main menu.
PICKING ORDERS IN ONE SCAN
One-scan picking is only used in exceptional circumstances, when picking speed is more
important than accuracy. If you are using one-scan picking, your system may be additionally
configured to allow shorting during one-scan picking, or to prompt you to enter shipping
information, and so on. In the following procedure, no additional options are described.
You will need to have the picking/shipping labels for your orders available for scanning.
> To one-scan pick:
1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Pick + Pack. The Picking menu
is displayed. Select One-Scan Picking. You are prompted to scan a carton into which you
will pack products for this order.
ONE SCAN PICKING
Carton:
2. Pick the required products for your order, and pack them into the appropriate shipping
cartons.
3. Scan the picking/shipping label for any carton in the order, or enter the order number, and
press ENTER. A message is displayed confirming that your order is picked.
ONE SCAN PICKING
Carton:
ORDER PICKED!
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all orders in your wave.
5. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Picking menu.
2 0 5
HANDLING PICKS YOU CANNOT FULFILL

Occasionally, you may be sent to a pick which you cannot perform. While the system ensures
that each order is not released unless there is enough stock in the warehouse to fill it, you will
occasionally arrive at a bin that does not contain enough products to fill your order. This can
happen if someone has moved the product without recording it in RADIO BEACON WMS, the
product has been damaged, or the dispatcher has allocated the order by assuming 100% stock.
In other cases, the product may simply be difficult to reach or lift, may require special
equipment to remove it, or even other personnel to assist with it.
In many warehouses, situations where inventory is short must be handled manually; that is,
you must notify a dispatcher or supervisor, who will take an appropriate action, such as
suspending the order, contacting the customer for alternative instructions, and so on. However,
in other warehouses, your system may be configured to allow you to handle these situations
automatically by:
Skipping a pick
Skipping a pick allows you to temporarily skip a pick and return to it later. This feature is
useful if the product is available, but not easily accessible for the time being, and you need
to wait for assistance in picking it. You can also skip a pick in order to look for stock
elsewhere in the warehouse and move it to the appropriate bin for picking later.(See
Moving/Putting Away Inventory on page 65 for various ways of finding and moving
product from other bins.) When you skip a pick, however, you are still required to fulfill
the pick later, in order to complete the wave. To skip a pick, see the instructions in
Skipping a Pick on page 207.
Shorting a pick
Shorting a pick lets you ship an order with only partial quantities of products instead of
putting the entire order on hold because a certain product is not available. You can either
short an entire line, or you can short the quantity that is missing. Your system may be
configured to automatically issue a back order for the products that are missing. To short a
pick, see the instructions in Shorting a Pick on page 207.
SKIPPING A PICK
You can skip picks if your system is configured to allow you to do so.
> To skip a pick:
1. When you are prompted to scan a product or picking/shipping label in any of the picking
modes, press [F2] to skip the pick. You are directed to your next pick. When you have
completed picking the remaining lines in the wave, the system returns you to any skipped
picks:
PICKING
No More Picks.
Returning to
Skipped Picks.
Enter - Continue
2. Press ENTER to return to the first skipped item.
3. Pick any remaining skipped items until all picks in the wave are complete.
SHORTING A PICK
You can short picks if your system is configured to do so. There are two ways to short a pick:
Short a partial quantity. If there is some product available, and you want to ship this
quantity, you can short just the quantity that is missing. To short a partial quantity, follow
the steps in Shorting a Partial Quantity on page 208.
Short an entire line. If there is no product available for the line, you can ship the order
with no quantity of the ordered product. To short an entire line, follow the steps in
Shorting an Entire Line on page 209.
2 0 7
SHORTING A PARTIAL QUANTITY
> To short a partial quantity:
1. In regular or product picking, when prompted to enter the quantity for the product, enter
the quantity you were able to pick, and press ENTER.
Quantity ordered.
PRODUCT> LF551
100>100000025
Quantity:50
Enter the quantity you can pick here.
100000025
You are prompted you to scan the appropriate carton and enter the remaining quantity
(the missing number of products).
PRODUCT> LF551
50>100000025( 3)
Carton: Remaining quantity.
Quantity already picked.

100000025 50
2. To short the remaining quantity of this item, press [F6]. You are directed to the next pick.
3. Continue to pick the rest of the wave.
SHORTING AN ENTIRE LINE
> To short an entire line:
1. While regular picking or batch picking, when prompted to pick a product, do not scan a
product, but press [F6] to short the entire requested quantity. You are directed to the next
pick.
2. Continue to pick the rest of the wave.
UNPICKING AN ORDER
The Unpick function lets you handle situations where an order is completely picked and ready
to be shipped, and then there is a need to take items out of the order, return those items to stock
and, of course, the customer is never invoiced for those items.
There rules for the Unpick function are as follows:
You can only use the Unpick function for an order has been marked as all picked.
Unpick is performed on a carton level, which means that all items in a carton are
unpicked. Therefore, items that need to be shipped cannot be in the same carton as items
that need to be unpicked. If an order has cartons that contain both, you must repack the
order so that items that need to be unpicked are separated from items that will be shipped.
Described in Repacking Items on page 230.
Repacking is not necessary if all items that need to be unpicked are already in a separate
carton. For example, consider an order that has several cartons and there is no room on the
truck for the last carton. If this carton will not be shipped at all, this carton can be
unpicked.
The unpicked items are moved to the TRANSIT system locations. Then, the warehouse staff
can use direct move to move the unpicked product to the desired bin as described in Moving
Products In on page 80. The unpicked items are shorted on the order when it is uploaded to
the host.
2 0 9
> To unpick products in carton.
1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Pick + Pack and press ENTER.
From the Picking menu, press the number corresponding to Repack and press ENTER. The
Repack menu displays.
RePack 1/2 RePack 2/2

1-Repack Order
2-Repack Carton 1-Change Box Size
3-Repack Item 2-Reprint SSCC-18
4-Relabel Carton
5-Combine Cartons
6-Unpick Cartons
7-Mark as Repacked
2. From the Repack menu press the corresponding to Unpick Cartons and press ENTER.
You are prompted for the carton you want to unpick.
UNPICK CARTONS
Scan Carton
3. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER.
The order number and customer are displayed and you are prompted to confirm that you
want to unpick the items.
UNPICK CARTONS
100000142
Candy Co Ltd
All items in carton
will be unpicked
moved to TRANSIT
are you sure? (Y/N)
4. Press Y to unpick the carton and move the products from the order to your TRANSIT
location, or press N to cancel and re-enter a different carton.
If you press Y, you receive a confirmation that the carton has been unpicked and you are
reminded to void the carton.
UNPICK CARTONS
Scan Carton
* UNPICKED +
Please Void Carton
100000142
5. To unpick additional cartons, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Repack menu.
When products are unpicked, RADIO BEACON WMS puts them in the TRANSIT system
location. Later, you can move them the desired bins as described in Moving Products In on
page 80.
ENTERING SALES ORDERS

If you have the appropriate permissions, you can use the Sales Order by Walking function to
create orders on-the-fly for front-counter orders, or emergency orders which you do not want
to process through the normal RADIO BEACON WMS system. When you create a sales order on
the handheld, it does not need to be allocated by the system; rather, it must be manually picked
and packed from a bin which is known to have the required stock available.
2 1 1
Entering a sales order involves the following steps:
1. Create the sales order. Follow the procedure in Creating a Sales Order on page 212.
2. Add lines to the order. Follow the procedure in Adding Lines to a Sales Order on
page 214.
3. Optionally, edit lines in the order. Follow the procedure in Editing a Line Item in a Sales
Order on page 217.
4. Optionally, delete lines in the order. Follow the procedure in Deleting a Line Item in a
Sales Order on page 219.
5. Optionally, re-open the order for editing. Follow the procedure in Completing a Sales
Order on page 216.
6. Save the order. Follow the procedure in Completing a Sales Order on page 216.
CREATING A SALES ORDER
> To create a sales order:
1. From the Picking menu, press the number corresponding to Front Counter.
3. The SO by Walking screen displays. By default, a new sales order number is automatically
generated, and you are prompted to enter the customer for the order.
SO by Walking
Order #
00000002
Customer #
4. At the Customer # prompt, enter a customer number for this order, and press ENTER. If this
is a new customer, you are prompted to create the customer in the database.
SO by Walking
00000002
Customer #
Add New Cust (Y/N)?
5. Press Y to add the new customer, or N to cancel and re-enter the customer number. If the
customer already exists in the database, the customer name and location is displayed, and
you are prompted to confirm this information.
SO by Walking
00000002
Customer #
CDY321
THE CANDY MAN
Vancouver
CONFIRM? (Y/N)
6. Press Y to confirm that the customer is correct, or N to return to the first screen and re-
enter the customer number. You are prompted to enter the customers purchase order
number for this order.
SO by Walking
00000002
Customer #
CDY321
THE CANDY MAN
Customer Po #
2 1 3
7. At the Customer PO# prompt, enter the customers purchase order number for this order,
or press ENTER to skip entering a purchase order. A new line is created (it is displayed as 0
before you select a product for the line).
SOBWA - LINE # 0
00000002
CDY321
THE CANDY MAN
Product:
8. To continue, follow the steps in Adding Lines to a Sales Order on page 214.
ADDING LINES TO A SALES ORDER
> To add lines to a sales order:
1. At the Product prompt, scan the barcode label of the product for this line, or enter the
product number and press ENTER. If you try to enter a product for which no stock is
available, you receive an error message. To correct this, press ENTER and at the Cancel
Order? prompt, press Y to cancel the order, or N to enter a new product.
A list of bins in which the product is currently stored is displayed.
SOBWA-00000002 1/1
LOCATION:
1:BULK1- 4*2500
2:C1- 23* 25
3:D1- 5* 25
4:D1 1* 100
2. To select a bin from which you want to pick the product, if necessary, press ENTER to view
additional screens of bins, and press the number corresponding to the desired bin. You are
prompted to enter the quantity required of this product.
SOBWA - LINE # 0
00000002
LF211
Spearmint Gum
C1
Quantity:
3. At the Quantity prompt, enter the number of packs required and press ENTER. The line is
added to the order, as indicated by the 1 that now appears at the top of the screen.
SOBWA - LINE # 1
00000002
CDY321
THE CANDY MAN
Product:
F5-DELETE F6-MODIFY
To add more products to the order or to add more bins from which you want to pick
the same product, repeat this procedure.
To modify this line, follow the procedure in Editing a Line Item in a Sales Order on
page 217.
To delete this line, follow the procedure in Deleting a Line Item in a Sales Order on
page 219.
To complete the order, follow the procedure in Completing a Sales Order on

page 216.
2 1 5
COMPLETING A SALES ORDER
> To complete a sales order:
1. When you have added all necessary lines to your order, after completing a line item, press
ENTER to save the order. You are prompted to confirm the completion of the order.
SO By Walking
00000002
# Lines: 2
Save (Y/N/C)
2. Select from the following options:
Press To...
Y Save the sales order.

N Modify or delete or a line in the order.
C Cancel the order altogether and return to the SO By Walking
menu. Press [F1] if you want to return to the Picking Menu
If you selected N in step 2, modify or delete a line item, by following the procedures in
Editing a Line Item in a Sales Order on page 217 or Deleting a Line Item in a Sales
Order on page 219.
Otherwise, if your system is configured for the order to be created, carton labels are
printed for the order and you are prompted to scan the carton number.
SO By Walking
Order#
00000002
Scan Totlabel
3. Scan the barcode on the carton label, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. You are
returned to the Picking menu.
4. Pack the product into the appropriate carton.
EDITING A LINE ITEM IN A SALES ORDER
You can only edit a line item in a sales order before you have saved the order.
> To edit a line item:
1. After entering a complete line, or after pressing N when prompted to save an order, press
[F6] to modify any line in the order. You are prompted to enter the product number of the
line you want to modify.
SOBWA - MODIFY QTY

Product:
2 1 7
2. Scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the product number and press ENTER. You
are prompted to identify the bin from which you were to pick the product.
SOBWA - MODIFY QTY

Product:
LF211
Bin:
3. Scan the bins barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The quantity you
originally requested for the order is displayed, and you are prompted to enter a new
quantity.
SOBWA - MODIFY QTY

LF211
Spearmint Gum
C1
Quantity Picked:
1
Quantity To Pick:
4. Enter the new quantity and press ENTER. The message Qty Modified is displayed.
To modify another line, repeat this procedure.
To add more products to the order or to add more bins from which you want to
remove the same product, follow the procedure in Adding Lines to a Sales Order on
page 214.
To delete a line in the order, follow the procedure in Deleting a Line Item in a Sales
Order on page 219.

page 216.
DELETING A LINE ITEM IN A SALES ORDER
You can only delete a line from a sales order before you have saved the order.
> To delete a line item from a sales order:
1. After entering a complete line, or after pressing N when prompted to save an order, press
[F5] to delete any line in the order. You are prompted to enter the product number of the
line you want to delete.
SOBWA - DELETE LINE

Product:
2. Scan the products barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER. You are
prompted to identify the bin from which you were to pick the product.
SOBWA - MODIFY QTY

Product:
LF211
Bin:
2 1 9
3. Scan the bins barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The quantity you
originally requested for the order is displayed, and you are prompted to confirm the line
deletion.
SOBWA - MODIFY QTY

LF211
Spearmint Gum
C1
Qty Picked:
3 * 25
DELETE LINE(Y/N)
4. Press Y to delete the line, or press N to cancel. If you select Y and there are no other line
items in your order, you are returned to the product selection screen to create a new line
item.
5. To continue, do one of the following:
To add other products to the order, follow the procedure in Adding Lines to a Sales
Order on page 214.
To delete another line in the order, repeat this procedure.
To modify another line in the order, follow the procedure in Editing a Line Item in a
Sales Order on page 217.

page 216.
7 REPACKING ORDERS
UNDERSTANDING REPACKING FUNCTIONS

Once an order has been packed into a carton, you can move part, or all, of its contents into a
different carton, or into additional cartons, before shipping it. This process is called repacking.
You might want to repack a carton if it was overstuffed, poorly packed, or damaged
somewhere between the picking/packing and shipping stages. You can also use repacking to
consolidate several cartons that were picked and packed simultaneously in multiple warehouse
areas but belong to the same order. You may also need to repack cartons in order to unpick
items that were packed for an order. For more information about unpicking cartons see
Unpicking an Order on page 209.
Several functions are available for repacking orders:
Repack Order
This function repacks all the cartons in an order into new or existing cartons, by
unpicking all of the items and moving them into the BATCHPCK location just as if the
order had been batch picked. It then allows you to repick the order using any picking
method, although typically you would product pick, so that you can select the products
you want to repack in the sequence you want. Use this function when your order consists
of a single carton, or you need to repack all the cartons in an order; follow the procedure in
Repacking Entire Orders on page 224.
2 2 1
Repack Carton
This function repacks one carton into a new or existing carton, by unpicking all of the
items in a carton and moving them into the BATCHPCK location just as if those items had
been batch picked. It then allows you to repick the items using any picking method,
although typically you would product pick, so that you can select the products you want to
repack in the sequence you want. Use this function when your order consists of multiple
cartons, but you only need to repack one or some of them; follow the procedure in
Repacking Cartons on page 226.
Repack Item
This function repacks one product into a new or existing carton. This option does not
unpick and then re-pick products into their new carton. Instead, it simply transfers items
between two cartons. Use this function when your order consists of one or multiple
cartons, but you only need to repack one or some of the items from the order; follow the
procedure in Repacking Items on page 230.
Combine Cartons
This function repacks all the items from one carton into an existing carton. This option
does not unpick and then re-pick products into their new carton. Instead, it simply
transfers items between two cartons. Use this function when your order consists of
multiple cartons, but can be repacked more efficiently into fewer cartons. Combining
cartons is described in Combining Cartons in an Order on page 232.
Relabel Carton
This function prints a new carton label. Use this function when you simply need to replace
the label on a carton. Relabelling cartons is described in Relabeling Cartons on
page 233.
Change Box
This function lets you change the box size. Use this function when you need to pack the
items in a different size box than originally designated for the carton. Changing box sizes
is described in Changing a Carton Size on page 234.
2 2 2 CHAPTER 7 R E P A C K I N G O R D E R S
Marking a Carton as Repacked
If an order requires that it must be repacked before the order can go out the door, use the
Mark as Repacked function to indicate when the repack process has been completed.
Described in Marking a Carton As Repacked on page 236.
If you need to stop and restart repacking, follow the procedures in Stopping and Restarting
Repacking on page 228.
All of the functions described in this chapter are available through the Repack menu.
> To access the Repack menu:
The Picking menu is displayed.
2. From the Picking menu, press the number corresponding to RePack and press ENTER. The
Repack menu displays.
RePack 1/2 RePack 2/2

1-Repack Order
2-Repack Carton 1-Change Box Size
3-Repack Item 2-Reprint SSCC-18
4-Relabel Carton
5-Combine Cartons
6-Unpick Cartons
7-Mark as Repacked
2 2 3
REPACKING ENTIRE ORDERS

> To repack an order:
1. From the Repack menu, press 1 to select Repack Order. You are warned that the lines
picked for the order will be moved into the temporary location BATCHPCK.
REPACK PICKING
Scan a Carton
ALL Goods Picked

For this Order
Will be Reset to
BATCHPCK !!
2. Scan the picking/shipping label of one of the cartons in the order, or enter the carton
number, or the order number, and press ENTER. The total number of lines, units, and cube
for the order are displayed.
REPACK: F2-START
199
Lines: 2
Units: 1000
Cube: 56000
# Labels:
3. If you need additional cartons, and need to print picking/shipping labels for them, at the #
Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want and press ENTER; otherwise simply
press ENTER or press [F2]. The regular wave picking screen is displayed.
8 PACKS OF 25
BIN:C2
LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
200>10000105 (18)
If you want to continue by repacking If you want to repack products in the

products into cartons in the sequence in sequence you choose, press [F9] to repack
which the system directs you, follow steps by product. The Product Repack screen is
3 to 8 in Picking Orders by Wave displayed.
(Regular Picking) on page 193.
PRODUCT REPACK
2 Picks Remain
Scan Item:
F7: New Label
Optionally, if you need an additional

carton and want to print a new label, press
[F7].
To continue, follow steps 4 to 9 in

Picking Orders by Product on page 199
of Picking and Packing Orders.
2 2 5
REPACKING CARTONS
> To repack a carton:
1. From the Repack menu, press 2 to select Repack Carton. You are warned that the lines
REPACK PICKING
Scan a Carton
ALL Goods Picked

For this Carton
Will be Reset to
BATCHPCK !!
2. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton you want to repack, or enter the carton
number and press ENTER. The total number of line and units for the carton are displayed.
REPACK F2-START
176
Carton:100000009
Lines: 2
Units: 300
# Labels:
3. If you need additional cartons, and need to print picking/shipping labels for them, at the #
Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want and press ENTER; otherwise simply
press ENTER or press [F2]. The regular wave picking screen is displayed.
1 PACKS OF 100
BIN:C3
LF600
Breath Savers
Wintergreen
1>100000018
If you want to continue by repacking If you want to repack products in the

products into cartons in the sequence in sequence you choose, press [F9] to repack
which the system directs you, follow steps by product. The Product Repack screen is
3 to 8 in Picking Orders by Wave displayed.
(Regular Picking) on page 193 of
Picking and Packing Orders. PPRODUCT REPACK
2 Picks Remain
Scan Item:
F7: New Label
Optionally, if you need an additional

carton and want to print a new label, press
[F7].
To continue, follow steps 4 to 9 in

Picking Orders by Product on page 199
of Picking and Packing Orders.
2 2 7
STOPPING AND RESTARTING REPACKING

While repacking a carton, you may need to interrupt the repacking process. Procedures for
stopping and restarting repacking operations are provided below.
> To stop repacking:
1. Press [F1] at any point during repacking. If you have repacked any lines in the order or
carton, and your system is configured to do so, you are prompted to redo the last pick.
BDG W: 1005
Interrupted! Redo?
LF311
Juicy Fruit
100000012 300
To leave the last pick as is, press N, and you are directed to the next pick.
To exit the function, press [F1] again. You are prompted to assemble the next wave.
Press Y to begin a new order to repack, or press N to return to the main menu.
> To restart repacking:
1. From the Repack menu, press 1 to select Repack Order. You are warned that the lines
REPACK PICKING
Scan an Order
ALL Goods Picked

For this Order
Will be Reset to
BATCHPCK !!
2. Scan the picking/shipping label of one of the cartons in the order, or enter the carton
number, or the order number, and press ENTER. If any lines have already been repacked for
the order, and your system is configured to do so, you are prompted to redo the last pick.
REPACK PICKING
195
CDY321
The Candy Man
Reset Completed
Picks (Y/N)?
To redo all picks, press Y, and you are directed to the first pick in the order.
To leave all picks as is, press N, and you are directed to the next pick in the order.
4. Repack the items in the carton as necessary.
2 2 9
REPACKING ITEMS
> To repack an item:
1. From the Repack menu, press 3 to select Repack Item. You are prompted to scan the
carton from which you want to move the item.
PACKING:
Please Scan
FROM Carton
You are prompted to scan the carton to which you want to move the item.
PACKING:
203
From: 100000004
Scan TO Carton
You are prompted to scan the product you wish to repack.
PACKING:
203
From: 100000004
To: 100000008
Scan Product
4. Scan the products barcode label, or enter the product number, and press ENTER. You are
prompted to enter the quantity to move.
PACKING:
203
From: 100000004
To: 100000008
> LF522
Enter Quantity
Note: If you change your mind and want to undo a repack, you can press [F2] to unpack
the item back into its original carton.
5. Repack the desired number of items, and enter the number of units/packs you moved and
press ENTER. A message is displayed confirming the move.
PACKING:
203
From: 100000004
To: 100000008
LF522
* MOVED 100 *
6. To move another product from the carton, press ENTER and repeat steps 2 to 5.
2 3 1
COMBINING CARTONS IN AN ORDER

> To combine cartons in an order:
1. From the Repack menu, press 5 to select Combine Cartons. You are prompted to scan the
first carton from which you want to move the products.
COMBINE CARTONS
Scan FROM Carton
You are prompted to scan the carton to which you want to move the products.
COMBINE CARTONS
203
Sweet Thoughts
500 Garden Ave.
Scan TO Carton
A message is displayed confirming the move.
COMBINE CARTONS
Scan FROM Carton
* COMBINED *
100000009
Should be Empty
4. Repack all the items into the new carton, and physically dispose of the old carton. (The
carton label number will be deleted automatically.)
5. To combine additional cartons, press ENTER and repeat the procedure.
RELABELING CARTONS
> To relabel a carton:
1. From the Repack menu, press 4 to select Relabel Carton. You are prompted to scan the
label you want to replace.
REPACK PICKING
Scan a carton
Scan a carton to
re-label.
2. Scan the picking/shipping label for the carton, or enter the carton number and press ENTER.
The order number, and the number of products and total units in the carton are displayed,
and you are prompted to confirm that you want to relabel the carton:
REPACK PICKING
104
Items: 3
Units: 500
FROM: 100000101
New Label? Yes/No?
2 3 3
3. Press Y to relabel this carton; otherwise, press N and you are returned to the previous
screen. If you pressed Y, a new picking/shipping label is generated, and the new carton
number is displayed.
REPACK PICKING
194
Relabel Carton
100000101
to
100000113
Enter Continue
4. Collect the new label from the printer, remove the old label from your carton, and affix the
new label to the carton. All products assigned to the old label are now assigned to the new
label.
5. Press ENTER to continue. You are returned to the first Relabel Carton screen.
6. To relabel more cartons, repeat steps 2 to 5.
CHANGING A CARTON SIZE

> To change a carton:
1. From the Repack menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary,
and press the number corresponding to Change Box Size. You are prompted to scan
the carton label for which you want to choose a new box size.
CHANGE BOX SIZE
Carton:
The carton number, and the current box size are displayed, and you are prompted to enter
the new box size.
CHANGE BOX SIZE
Carton
100000055
Current Size: 5
New Box Size:
3. Type the new box size and press ENTER. You receive a message that the box size is
changed, and then you can enter a different carton to change size
CHANGE BOX SIZE
Carton:
Box Sizes Changed
4. To change additional box sizes, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Repack menu.
2 3 5
MARKING A CARTON AS REPACKED

An order may be configured by an end-of-line process to require that cartons be repacked
before the order can be shipped. Once the repack is completed, you must use the Mark as
Repacked function to inform RADIO BEACON WMS that it is done and mark the order as ready
to upload. Mark as repacked is only used on cartons that are configured to require a Repack
end-of-line process.
> To mark a carton as repacked:
and press the number corresponding to Mark as Repacked. You are prompted to
scan the carton label for the carton you wish to mark as repacked.
MARK AS REPACKED
Carton:
A message is received that the carton is marked as repacked, indicating that the required
end-of-line process is completed.
MARK AS REPACKED
Carton:
Mark as Repacked
3. To mark additional cartons as repacked, repeat step 2.
4. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Repack menu.
8 SHIPPING ORDERS
UNDERSTANDING SHIPPING FUNCTIONS

The RADIO BEACON WMS shipping functions you use in your warehouse will depend on a
number of factors, including the type of automated shipping system you use, if any, your
system configuration, the carrier handling a given order, and whether weights are recorded for
products in your RADIO BEACON WMS database.
If you are using a fully integrated shipping system, such as Clippership, and weights are
recorded in the RADIO BEACON WMS database for all your products in the warehouse, you
SHIP may not need to perform any shipping functions in RADIO BEACON WMS at all. However,
most warehouses use at least one of the following functions to obtain and provide carton and
order shipping information to RADIO BEACON WMS:
Carton Shipping
This function allows you to scan shipping cartons and weigh them. You typically use this
function in the following circumstances:
Your warehouse uses a partially integrated shipping system, such as UPS Worldship,
Fedex, or Imagine. Carton weights and shipping information are sent to the shipping
systems so that the cartons can be rated and manifested, and the rating/cost
information is automatically sent back to RADIO BEACON WMS.
Your warehouse uses an integrated shipping system, such as ClipperShip and

SHIP NeoPost, but weights or dunnage factors have not been recorded for the products in
the orders, or you are handling orders that require additional, manual processing on
the shipping system. Carton weights are sent to the shipping system, which can then
rate and manifest the order, and the rating/cost information is automatically sent back
to RADIO BEACON WMS.
2 3 7
An order has been case-picked without a handheld. The Carton Shipping function
serves to pick the product from inventory.
You want to check the status of a shipping carton.
You want to view or override shipping errors.
You want to re-weigh shipping cartons so that the integrated shipping system can re-
rate them, after shipping errors have been corrected or cleared.
Depending on the shipping processes specified for the order, the order may be marked as
shipped as soon as the cartons are scanned in this function, or when shipping has been
confirmed by the integrated shipping system.
The Carton Shipping function is described in Processing Shipping Cartons on page 240.
Record Shipment
You use this function to manually record shipment information for orders, including final
costs, shipment numbers, and so on. You typically use this function in the following
circumstances:
Your warehouse uses a standalone shipping system, a partially integrated shipping

system, such as Disticom, Canpar, Canada Post, and UPS, or no shipping system. You
scan and weigh cartons on the shipping system, and then use the Record Shipment
function to enter the data you have obtained from the shipping system (or by a manual
process).
Your warehouse uses a fully integrated shipping system, but you need to record
additional or special shipment information that may not normally be provided to
RADIO BEACON WMS by your shipping system.
2 3 8 CHAPTER 8 S H I P P I N G O R D E R S
Additional shipping functions that you may use on the handheld include the following:
Handling shipping errors You use the Carton Shipping function to display and,
optionally, override any shipping errors that have been encountered by orders when an
integrated shipping system has attempted to rate and manifest them. Described in
Handling Shipping Errors on page 245.
Re-rating cartons You use the Carton Shipping function to resend shipping information
and weights to an integrated shipping system for automatic re-rating, after shipping errors
have been corrected, or any shipment information has been modified. Described in Re-
rating Cartons on page 248.
Capturing additional barcodes for cartons You use the Carton Shipping function to
capture an additional barcode that may have been generated by an external shipping
system, such as a track-trace number. Capturing the barcode allows you to associate this
code with the carton and pass this information to the accounting system during upload
from RADIO BEACON WMS. Described in Capturing Additional Barcodes on page 259.
SHIP Adding cartons to pallets You can use the Add to Pallet function to associate cartons
with a pallet, for shipping purposes. Described in Adding Cartons to Pallets on
page 261.
Marking an external process complete If an order requires that an external or manual

process be executed before the order can go out the door, you must use the Mark External
function to indicate when the process has been completed. Described in Marking
External Processes Complete on page 264.
Stage order and ship staged orders To organize cartons for shipment out of the
warehouse, you can gather out-going cartons in a staging area, according to truck route or
other criteria. Then, you can ship the staged orders that were collected out of the
warehouse.
All of the functions described in this chapter are available through the Shipping menu.
2 3 9
> To access the Shipping menu:
From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Shipping. The Shipping menu is
displayed.
SHIPPING 1/2 SHIPPING 2/2

1-Stage Order 1-Show Bignumber
2-Ship Staged Order 2-Carton Lookup
3-Add to Pallet
4-Carton Shipping
5-Record Shipment
6-Reprint Packslip
7-Mark External
PROCESSING SHIPPING CARTONS

The Carton Shipping function allows you to weigh a carton, check its status, and optionally,
print an additional paper packslip, capture additional barcodes, and have cartons re-rated by an
integrated shipping system.
At a minimum, you will be prompted to scan the carton. You may also be required to enter the
weight, carton size and dunnage weight and/or to scan an additional barcode. Finally, any
special instructions that have been specified for the order are displayed to you here.
> To check in cartons:
1. From the Shipping menu, press the number corresponding to Carton Shipping. You are
prompted to select the method you want to use to record the shipping weight of your
cartons.
Select Scale
1) No Weight
2) Manual Weight
3) Scale #1
4) Scale #2

If all your cartons already If you have weigh scales If you have a weigh scale
have accurate weights connected to RADIO that is not connected to
recorded for the products BEACON and you want to RADIO BEACON and you
they contain, the system is use one of them to capture want to use it to weigh
configured to the shipping weight of each carton, and enter the
automatically calculate the each carton, press 3 to use information manually,
dunnage for the cartons, Scale #1 or press 4 to use press 2.
and you do not need to Scale #2 (where available).
weigh them again, press 1.
You are prompted to enter the carton you want to process, and if there are any shipping
errors in the system, a message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:
22 SHIP ERRORS
To reprint a Crystal (paper) packslip for the carton, press [F7]. The message Reprint
appears at the bottom of the screen.
To view shipping errors, follow the instructions in Handling Shipping Errors on

page 245.
To have a shipping system re-rate the carton, press [F4]. The message Rating appears
at the bottom of the screen.
To capture an additional barcode for the carton, press [F6], and at the Barcode prompt
that appears, scan the barcode.
2 4 1
4. At the Carton prompt, scan the picking/shipping label for the carton you want to process,
or enter the carton number and press ENTER.
Note: If you are using Scale #1 or Scale #2 to capture the shipping weight of your carton,
make sure that the carton is on your selected scale before you scan its label or enter its
label number. When you scan or enter the picking label for that carton, its weight is
captured.
If the carton you scanned has already been processed, or cannot be processed, any of the
following statuses may be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Message/ Indicates...
Status
INVALID This carton number does not exist, or the carton is empty.
CARTON!
WAITING for The order was marked to be automatically rated and manifested
RATE by the shipping system and the carton is still waiting to be rated
and manifested.
RATING ERROR The order was marked to be automatically rated and manifested
(or a specific error by the shipping system and the carton has encountered a rating
message) error as the shipping system attempted to rate and manifest it.
SHIPD -STILL The carton has been marked as shipped. There are still picks left
MORE in this order.
SHIPPED The carton has been marked as shipped. The entire order has
been picked.
ALREADY GONE The order with this carton has already been uploaded, but this
carton has not yet been marked as shipped.
ALREADY The order with this carton has already been uploaded, and this
SHIPPED carton has already been marked as shipped.
If you receive one of these messages, scan another carton, or press ENTER to exit this
function and return to the Shipping menu.
If you selected No Weight in step 2, and if any products in your carton do not have a
weight recorded, this message is displayed:
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:
NEED A WEIGHT!
Exit the function, by pressing [F1], re-enter the function, and at the Select Scale screen,
select 2 to manually enter a weight.
If you chose to manually enter the weight for your carton, you are prompted to enter it
now.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:100000056
Weight:
2 4 3
5. Enter the shipping weight of your carton and press ENTER. If your system is configured to
prevent cartons from being rated and manifested by a shipping system outside of a certain
window of time (e.g. three days before the required date of the carton), the required date
for the order is displayed.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:100000056
Hold Carton
REQD 20001204
Put the carton aside until the time when it can be processed by the shipping system, or
notify your dispatcher, who can override this setting, if necessary. Press ENTER to
continue.
If there are hold messages or special instructions for this carton, they are displayed now.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:100000056
Hold Carton
Apply special
packaging
6. Perform the task as prompted, and press ENTER. If you are required to scan an additional
barcode, such as an extra shipping label you may have printed from an external shipping
system, you are prompted to do so.
CARTON SHIPPING
Barcode:
7. Scan the barcode label. A message appears at the bottom of the screen, indicating that the
carton has been processed.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:
100000056 SCANNED
8. To process additional cartons, repeat steps 2 to 7.
9. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Shipping menu.
HANDLING SHIPPING ERRORS

Each time you start the Carton Shipping function, RADIO BEACON WMS checks all cartons for
any outstanding shipping errors which may have been incurred during the rating and
manifesting process. Common problems include carton weights of zero and incorrect or
missing postal/zip codes. These shipping errors need to be corrected before the cartons can be
rated.
For cartons with shipping errors, you have the following options:
Notify the dispatcher. For errors that result from incorrect data in the order, the dispatcher
will correct the order and notify the shipping system from Web Dispatch to have the order
re-rated.
Take the appropriate measures to correct the source of the problem. For missing weight
errors, you must weigh the cartons and have them re-rated.
Bypass the rating process and automatically mark the cartons shipped. You can use this
option if you want to manually process the carton on the shipping system.
2 4 5
> To view shipping errors:
1. From the Shipping menu, press 5 to select Carton Shipping. You are prompted to select
the method you want to use to record the shipping weight of your cartons:
Select Scale
1) No Weight
2) Manual Weight
3) Scale #1
4) Scale #2
2. Press 1 to skip entering a weight. If there are any shipping errors in the system, a message
is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:
22 SHIP ERRORS
3. Press [F5] to find out which cartons have shipping errors. A list of cartons and their
associated shipping errors is displayed.
Ship Errs 1/1

Select Carton:
1:100000001 Weight
2:100000002 Weight
3:100000003 No Car
4. Optionally, press ENTER to view additional screens of cartons, and press the number
corresponding to a carton whose details you want to view.
Note: Up to 100 cartons with rating errors can be displayed. If your system has more than
100 cartons with errors, the Web dispatcher can run a Shipping Errors report to view
all of them.
The shipping details for that cartons order are displayed.
SHIPPING ERROR
197
CARTON:100000001
SHPVIA: UPS
SERVCE:
OPTION:
ERR:Weight must be
greater than 0
If the carton is missing a weight (indicated by the message Weight must be greater
than 0), enter a weight and re-rate the carton; for instructions, see Re-rating
Notify the dispatcher, who will determine the appropriate means of correcting the
error.
To force this carton to be marked as shipped without correcting its rating, press [F6].
The message SHIPPED appears at the bottom of the screen. The carton will bypass the
shipping system, and will not be rated or included on a shipping manifest.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all cartons with errors that you want to process.
7. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Shipping menu.
2 4 7
RE-RATING CARTONS
Re-rating a carton allows you to manually send a carton to the integrated shipping system to be
rated and manifested. You can re-rate a carton to correct weight-related shipping errors, or if
the carrier or service for the order has been changed since the order was initially rated.
> To re-rate a carton:
the method you want to use to record the shipping weight of your cartons.
Select Scale
1) No Weight
2) Manual Weight
3) Scale #1
4) Scale #2
If you have weigh scales connected to RADIO BEACON WMS, press 3 to use Scale #1
or press 4 to use Scale #2 (where available).
If you have a weigh scale that is not connected to RADIO BEACON WMS, and you
want to enter the weight manually, press 2.
Note: Do not select the No Weight option, as entering a carton weight of zero will cause a
rating error on the shipping system.
You are prompted to enter the carton you want to process.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:
3. Press [F4]. A message appears, indicating that the carton will be re-rated.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:
RATING...
Note: If you are using Scale #1 or Scale #2 to capture the shipping weight of your carton,
make sure that the carton is on your selected scale before you scan its label or enter its
carton number. When you scan or enter the picking/shipping label for that carton, its
weight is captured.
4. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton you want to process, or enter the carton
number and press ENTER. If you chose to weigh your cartons on a scale not connected to
RADIO BEACON WMS, you are prompted to enter the weight of the carton.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:100000056
Weight:
2 4 9
5. Enter the shipping weight of your carton and press ENTER. A message appears at the
bottom of the screen, indicating that the carton has been processed.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:
100000056 SCANNED
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for all cartons with errors that you want to process.
RECORDING SHIPMENT DETAILS

The Record Shipment function allows you to manually record shipping information for orders
or cartons. You can use this function if your warehouse is not using an integrated shipping
system, or if the carton that you are shipping requires special instructions that your integrated
shipping system is not set up to perform automatically.
Your system will be configured to require that you provide information for only one carton in
an order, or for each carton in an order. Also, for each carton you record, certain details may be
optional, while others may be required. For required details, you are prompted to enter each
one. For optional details, you can display a menu from which you can select the details you
want to provide, or skip entering them altogether.
There are two types of shipment details that may be configured as required, optional, or not
required: shipment details, and carton details. Shipment details provide information about the
entire shipment, which may include several cartons. The full set of shipment details includes
the following:
Shipment Explanation
Detail
Ship Date The date that the carton (or order) will leave the warehouse. The date
format is MMDDYY.
Pickup (BOL/ A number that identifies a group of orders shipped on the same truck or
Manifest) picked up at the same time by one carrier.
Number
Ship Via The carrier by which the carton will be shipped.
Service The service by which the carton will be shipped, as defined by your
chosen carrier (e.g. Next Day, 3 Day, Express).
Ship Zone The geographical zone to which the goods are shipped, as defined by your
chosen carrier.
Shipment Cost The total cost of shipping all cartons in the order.
Shipment The total weight of all cartons in the order.

Weight
Payment The method of payment for the shipping costs. Payment types include:
method
P Prepaid
C Consignee
B Bill Recipient
T Third-Party
Your warehouse may also have other defined payment types.
Customer The account number to which the shipping costs will be charged.
Payment Shipping costs will only be charged to this account if the Payment Type is
Account set to B (see above).
2 5 1
Shipment Explanation
Detail
Cost Centre The customers company division that will be charged for the shipping
costs, for customers who want to associate shipping costs with a specific
division in their company.
Declared The value of the carton insured by the carrier for loss or damage.
Value
Declared The number assigned by the carrier if insurance for this carton has been
Value arranged.
Authorization
Special Any services requested of the carrier for this order, as defined by the
Services carrier.
Shipment A unique number assigned to all cartons shipped together in one shipment
Number (such as all the cartons in one order). In single carton shipments, the
shipment number is the same as the track & trace number for the carton.
Carton details provide information about each carton in the order. The full set of carton details
includes the following:
Carton Explanation
Detail
Carton Cost The cost of shipping a single carton.
Carton Weight The weight of a single carton.
Carton Cube The cube of a single carton.
> To record the shipping information for an order:
1. From the Shipping menu, press 3 to select Record Shipment. You are prompted to enter
the carton for which you want to record shipping information.
SHIPPING Aug 27
Carton:
2. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton for which you want to record shipping
information, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. If the carton has already been
processed, you are prompted to re-record its shipping information.
000000020
That carton
is shipped!
f2-Ship Again
Enter-skip
3. Press [F2] to re-record shipment information, or press ENTER to select another carton.
Order details, as well as the number of cartons that have been processed for the order so
far (0 to start), are displayed.
SHIPPING Aug 27
The Candy Man
195 0
0 Carton(s)
f1: Quit
Enter-continue
2 5 3
4. Press ENTER to record the shipping information for this carton. You are prompted to enter
the first required shipment detail. If any information is already recorded for this item, it is
displayed as a default.
SHIPPING Aug 27
The Candy Man
195 0
Enter Ship Date:
Default: 082702
5. Enter the required information, or press ENTER to accept the default. You are prompted to
enter the next required detail.
Note: If you are prompted to enter the total shipment cost and/or total shipment weight, and
are shipping each carton in an order as a separate shipment, do not enter a value at
this prompt, but leave the default of 0.00. You will be re-prompted to enter the
shipment cost and weight for each carton after any optional details have been
collected.
6. Repeat step 5 for all required details, as described in the shipment details table on
page 250. When you have provided all required details, if any details are configured by
your system as optional, you are prompted to display the Shipment options menu.
SHIPPING Aug 27
The Candy Man
195 0
Enter Shipment
Options (Y/N):
Enter-no
7. Press Y to display the Shipment options menu, or press N or ENTER to skip entering
optional details. If you pressed N, continue by going to step 11; if you pressed Y, the
Shipment options menu is displayed.
SHIPMENT 1/1
Select Option:
1:Declared Value
2:Dcl Val Authr#
3:Special Servcs
8. If necessary, press ENTER to display an additional screen of details, and press the number
corresponding to the first optional shipment detail you want to provide. You are prompted
to enter the appropriate information. If any information is already recorded for this item, it
is displayed as a default.
SHIPPING Aug 27
The Candy Man
195 0
Enter Declared Value:
Default: 0.00
9. Enter the required information, or press ENTER to accept the default. You are returned to
the Shipment options menu, from which you can select another detail to provide.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 for each detail you want to provide, and when done, press ENTER.
2 5 5
11. If you did not provide shipment cost or weight information initially, when re-prompted,
enter the cost and/or weight for the carton at each prompt, and press ENTER. If any carton
details have been configured as optional, you are prompted to display the Carton options
menu.
SHIPPING Aug 27
The Candy Man
195 0
Enter Carton
Options (Y/N):
Enter-no
12. Press Y to display the Carton options menu, or press N or ENTER to skip entering optional
details. If you pressed N, continue by going to step 17. If you pressed Y, the Carton
options menu is displayed.
CARTON 1/1
Select Option:
1:Carton Cube
13. Press the number corresponding to the first optional carton detail you want to provide.
You are prompted to enter the appropriate information. If any information is already
recorded for this item, it is displayed as a default.
SHIPPING Aug 27
The Candy Man
195 0
Enter the cube of

this carton:
Default: 0.00
14. Enter the required information, or press ENTER to accept the default. You are returned to
the Carton options menu, from which you can select another detail to provide.
15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for each carton detail you want to provide, and when done, press
ENTER. When you have entered all information, if your system is configured to allow you
to scan a single carton for the order, a message is displayed at the bottom of the screen
indicating that the order has been fully recorded.
SHIPPING Aug 27
Carton:
Done
To record additional shipments, repeat the procedure; otherwise, press ENTER to return to
the Shipping menu.
If your system is configured to require you to scan all cartons in an order, you are
prompted to scan the next carton.
SHIPPING Aug 27
The Candy Man
195 1
Scan or enter
the carton#:
f5: view/select
2 5 7
Scan the picking/shipping label of a carton To select a carton from the remaining
for which you want to record carton cartons in the order, press [F5]. A list of
information, or enter the carton number the remaining cartons in the order is
and press ENTER. displayed. If necessary, press ENTER to
display additional screens of cartons, and
press the number corresponding to the
carton for which you want to record
details.
195 1/1
Select Carton:
1:100000020
2:100000021
17. If you did not provide shipment cost or weight information for the entire order initially,
and you are prompted to enter the information for this carton, provide the appropriate
information and press ENTER. You are prompted to display the Carton options menu.
SHIPPING Aug 27
The Candy Man
195 1
Enter Carton
Options (Y/N):
Enter-no
18. Press Y, and follow steps 13 to 15.
19. Repeat steps 16 to 18 for all remaining cartons in the order.
20. When done, press ENTER. If there are any other cartons in the shipment that you have not
recorded, the following message is displayed.
Unshipped totes
found for
previous order
Press Enter to
ignore them or
F5 view/select
21. Press [F5] to record details for additional cartons in the order, and repeat steps 16 to 19;
otherwise, press ENTER and you are returned to the first Record Shipment screen.
22. To record additional shipments, repeat the entire procedure.
CAPTURING ADDITIONAL BARCODES

In some situations, you may need to capture an additional barcode for a carton. Typically, this
is necessary when you have manually processed the carton on an external shipping system, and
an additional label with a tracking number has been generated for the carton. By capturing this
additional barcode, the tracking number can be recorded in RADIO BEACON WMS and
uploaded to the accounting system.
In some cases, you may automatically be prompted to capture the barcode in the Carton
Shipping function. If you are not prompted, you can use this procedure to display the barcode
prompt.
2 5 9
> To capture an additional barcode:
the method you want to use to record the shipping weight of your cartons:
Select Scale
1) No Weight
2) Manual Weight
3) Scale #1
4) Scale #2
2. Press 1 to skip entering a weight. You are prompted to enter the carton you want to
process.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:
3. Press [F6]. You are prompted to scan or enter the additional barcode.
CARTON SHIPPING
Barcode:
4. Scan the additional barcode. You are returned to the Carton prompt.
5. Scan the picking/shipping label of the carton with which you want to associate the
barcode, or enter the carton number, and press ENTER. A message appears at the bottom of
the screen, indicating that the carton has been processed.
CARTON SHIPPING
Carton:
100000056 SCANNED
6. To process additional cartons, repeat steps 2 to 5.
ADDING CARTONS TO PALLETS

While RADIO BEACON WMS does not actually ship cartons by pallet, your host system may
SHIP often reference finished orders by pallet number, and certain large retailers will only accept
orders shipped by pallet. In these contexts, you can use the Add to Pallet function to add or
associate cartons with a pallet, whether the pallet is an actual physical pallet, or simply a
virtual entity that you designate by a pallet number.
When you add cartons to a pallet, you can print a new pallet label, if it was not already printed
in picking or packing. Pallet labels print the same information as regular picking/shipping
labels, but the track-trace number uses a 1 or 2 digit to indicate the type of shipment,
rather than the default 0 used for a carton.
2 6 1
> To add cartons to a pallet:
1. From the Shipping menu, press 6 to select Add To Pallet. You are prompted to scan the
carton you want to add to a pallet.
ASSIGN TO PALLET
Carton:
The customer track-trace number for the carton is displayed, and you are prompted to
enter the pallet with which you want to associate this carton.
ASSIGN TO PALLET
Sweet Thoughts
000384635810000000161
Pallet:

If you already have a pallet label, scan its If you do not yet have a pallet label, press
barcode, or enter the pallet carton [F7] and continue to step 4.
number (that is, the 1000... number), and
press ENTER. A message appears, # Labels:
indicating that the carton has been 199
assigned to the selected pallet.
-or-
ASSIGN TO PALLET F4- Store Pallet
Carton: F5- Mixed Pallet
F6- Truckload
* ASSIGNED *
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each carton you

want to add to a pallet.
4. When prompted to select a label, do one of the following:
To print a customer-specific pallet label for a shipment addressed to a single store,

press [F4].
To print a customer-specific pallet label for a shipment addressed to multiple stores,

press [F5].
To print a customer-specific pallet label for a shipment consisting of a large quantity

of the same product, press [F6].
The label is printed, and you are returned to the Assign to Pallet Screen.
5. Collect your pallet label.
2 6 3
6. At the Pallet prompt, scan the barcode of the label you just printed, or enter the pallet
carton number (that is, the 1000... number), and press ENTER. A message appears,
indicating that the carton has been assigned to the selected pallet.
ASSIGN TO PALLET
Carton:
* ASSIGNED *
7. To assign additional cartons to pallets, repeat steps 2 to 6.
MARKING EXTERNAL PROCESSES COMPLETE

An order may be configured by an end-of-line process to require that an external process be
executed before the order can be shipped. The external process may be an automated function,
such as another program that needs to perform a task before RADIO BEACON WMS uploads the
pick confirmation; or a manual function, such as a quality assurance inspection, that must be
performed before the order leaves the building. If an automated external process is required,
that process may automatically inform RADIO BEACON WMS when it is done and mark the
order as ready to upload. If the process is a manual one, or does not automatically update the
order status, you must use the Mark External function to do so.
> To mark an order as having completed an external process:
1. From the Shipping menu, press ENTER to view the second screen of functions, and press 1
to select Mark External. You are prompted to enter any carton in the order that has
completed an external process.
MARK EXTERNAL
Carton:
Scan carton
label or enter
packing slip #
2. Scan the picking/shipping label for the carton, or enter the carton number, or order
number, and press ENTER. A message appears confirming that the order has been marked,
and is now ready to be uploaded.
MARK EXTERNAL
Carton:
Scan carton
label or enter
packing slip #
* Marked!! *
3. To mark additional orders as having completed an external process, repeat step 2.
2 6 5
9 PRINTING LABELS
UNDERSTANDING LABEL PRINTING
Many handheld functions allow you to print different types of labels that are relevant to the
specific function you are performing. In many cases, you are even prompted to select the
number of labels to print, at the appropriate points of the process. Furthermore, your system
may be configured to print many different types of labels automatically in the background,
without your having to request them. An exhaustive list of all the types of labels that RADIO
BEACON WMS can print, and when they are normally printed, is provided in Label and
Document Printing in the manual Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS .
However, several independent printing functions are available that allow you to print labels at
any time during the warehouse process cycle. These functions print the following:
Bin labels see Printing Bin Labels on page 272.
Product labels see Printing Product Labels on page 276.
License Plates see Printing License Plates on page 287.
VPCD ASN (SSCC-18 format) labels on in-bound cartons see Reprinting ASN SSCC-18
Format Labels on page 288.
Generic or carrier-specific picking/shipping (SSCC-18) labels see Reprinting Picking/

Shipping Labels on page 289.
Crystal Reports (paper) packslips see Reprinting Paper Packslips on page 291.
Shipping carton labels see Printing Shipping Carton Labels on page 292.
Shipping pallet labels see Printing Placard Labels on page 296.
2 6 7
UNDERSTANDING PRINTER ASSIGNMENTS
In your RADIO BEACON WMSconfiguration, label printers are numbered from 1 to 24; laser
printers are numbered from 1 to 20. However, the physical printers on which labels and paper
documents are printed are determined by RADIO BEACON WMS logical printers. The
following table lists RADIO BEACON WMSs logical printers and indicates the labels that each
printer handles.
Logical Printer Labels Printed
Bin labels Bin labels

License plates
Product/UPC Product/UPC labels

Price tickets
Replenishment Letdown tickets
Receiving Overstock labels

SCC-14 labels
Putaway labels
Baggie labels
ASN SSCC-18 (reprint only)
Packing All Crystal Reports or other document files,

including Crystal pick tickets, paper packslips,
pallet placard labels, bills of lading, and manifests.
2 6 8 CHAPTER 9 P R I N T I N G L A B E L S
Logical Printer Labels Printed
Picking Assembly labels

Picking/shipping labels
Carrier-compliant picking/shipping labels
Customer-compliant picking/shipping labels
Pallet labels
Batch pick labels
Pre-packslip labels
Packing planner labels
Pick tickets
Baggie labels
Shipping Packslip labels

Carton contents labels
Numbered (N/M) contents labels
Carton summary labels
Order placard labels
RMA labels
Picking/shipping labels (reprint only)
Carrier-compliant picking/shipping labels (reprint
only)
The logical printers are assigned to default physical printers globally by your system
configuration. In addition, the global settings may also be overridden by user IDs; that is, your
user ID may be configured to specify different mappings for logical printers, and every time
you log on to RADIO BEACON WMS, your user ID settings determines the physical printer to
which print jobs are sent.
2 6 9
However, you can also change the physical printers on which the labels or files are to be
printed, on-the-fly, from the handheld. If you are in a different area of the warehouse, and not
near the printer from which you usually collect print jobs, you can use the Print Redirect
function to redirect logical printers to the physical printer you want. You can redirect printers
for labels that are printed automatically, as well as labels that you request yourself. For more
information on this function, see Redirecting Printers on page 270.
ABOUT THE PRINT LABELS MENU
Many of the functions discussed in this chapter are accessed through the Print Labels menu.
Some label printing function are available on menus were the functions are most commonly
performed.
> To access the Print Labels menu:
From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Label Printing and press ENTER.
The Print Labels menu is displayed.
Print Labels 1/2 Print Labels 2/2

1-Print Redirect 1- - Entire Orders
2-Content Label 2- - By Bin
3-N/M Contents 3-Product Lbls
4-Placard Labels 4- - Entire Orders
5-Bin Labels 5-SCC-14 Labels
6-License Plates 6-Summary Label
7-Overstock Lbls 7-Carton Label
REDIRECTING PRINTERS
If you move around the warehouse, and need to reassign the default logical printers, you can
do so from the handheld Print Redirect function, provided that you know the number assigned
in the system configuration to the physical printer to which you want to redirect print jobs.
Label printers are numbered from 1 to 24; laser printers are numbered from 1 to 20. If you do
not know the number of the physical printer you want, check with your system administrator.
When you redirect jobs to another printer, your changes override the defaults for this session
(or until you redirect them again). After you log off, the printer assignments are reset to their
defaults.
> To redirect a printer:
1. From the Print Labels menu, press the number corresponding to Print Redirect. The
Printer Redirect menu is displayed, with the current settings.
PRINTER REDIRECT
1-Picking: DFLT
2-Receiving: DFLT
3-Shipping: DFLT
4-Packing: DFLT
5-Bin Labels: DFLT
6-Product/UPC: DFLT
Redirect (1-6):
2. Press the number corresponding to the printer from which you want to redirect printing
jobs. If you are not sure which printer you need to reassign, consult the table in
Understanding Printer Assignments on page 268, which lists the types of labels that
each printer normally prints.
You are prompted to enter the number of the printer to which you want to redirect jobs.
PRINTER REDIRECT
1-Picking:
DFLT
Redirect to:
2 7 1
3. Enter the number of the physical printer to which you want to redirect jobs and press
ENTER. If you are not sure of the physical printer number you need, consult your system
administrator.
The Printer Redirect menu is re-displayed, with the number you specified for the selected
logical printer. All label printing jobs for that logical printer are now printed on the
physical printer you specified, until you log off the system, or until you redirect that
logical printer again.
PRINTER REDIRECT
1-Picking: #3
2-Receiving :DFLT
3-Shipping: DFLT
4-Packing: DFLT
5-Bin Labels: DFLT
6-Product/UPC DFLT
Redirect (1-6):
4. To redirect additional logical printers, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Print Labels menu.
PRINTING BIN LABELS

While all your bins will be labelled when RADIO BEACON WMS is first installed in your
warehouse, you may need to print new bin labels when adding new bins to your warehouse or
replacing damaged or faded bin labels. You print bin labels for a specified range of bins.
Bin labels often have a dash () separating the letters and numbers of the identifier on the
printed label so that it is easier to read bin numbers quickly.
> To print bin labels:
1. From the Print Labels menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if
necessary, and press the number corresponding to Bin Labels. The Bin Labels menu is
displayed. .
BIN LABELS 1/2 BIN LABELS 2/2

1-2 x 1/2 1-Custom Labels
2-2 x 3/4 2-Dash in Text
3-2 1/2 x 1
4-3 1/2 x 2
5-4 x 2
6-4 x 6
2. Optionally, to print bin labels with a dash () separating numbers in the bin location,
press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number
corresponding to Dash in Text before selecting the dimensions of your bin labels. You
are prompted to enter the position of the dash on the label.
BIN LABELS
Dash Position:
Dash will appear

in this position
on the label.
Enter a number that corresponds to the position of the dash character in your bin number.
For example, if your bin location is 68-455614, the position of the dash character in your
bin location is 3 (the dash is the third character in your bin number).
2 7 3
3. From the Bin Labels menu, press the number corresponding to the size of the label you
want to print. You are prompted to enter the first bin in the range of bins for which you
want to print labels.
BIN LABELS
First Bin
>
Last Bin
4. At the First Bin prompt, scan the bins existing barcode label, or enter the bin number
and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the last bin in the range of bins for which you
want to print labels.
BIN LABELS
First Bin
A1
Last Bin
>
5. At the Last Bin prompt, scan the bins existing barcode label, or enter the bin number and
press ENTER. You are prompted to confirm printing these labels.
BIN LABELS
You asked for 4

Labels.
Proceed
Yes/No ?
Note: The range of bins you enter must be valid, according to the bins defined in your
system setup. If you try to enter an invalid range of bins, you will receive an error
message. If you are unsure of the bin rules defined in your configuration, consult your
system administrator.
6. Press Y to print the listed number of labels; or press N to cancel. You are returned the
screen where you can enter a bin range for the label.
7. To print labels for additional ranges of bins, repeat steps 4 to 6.
8. To print bin labels in a different size or format, press ENTER to return to the Bin Labels
menu and repeat steps 2 to 6.
9. To exit the bin label printing function, press ENTER then press [F1]. You are returned to the
Print Labels menu.
2 7 5
PRINTING PRODUCT LABELS

You can print three types of product labels:
Product/UPC labels These are typically small labels which are attached to every unit of
a product. They show the product number, UPC, and product description, and contain a
unique identifier barcode (often the product number or UPC). To print product/UPC
labels, follow any of the procedures in Printing Product (Unit) Labels on page 276.
Overstock labels These are larger labels which are attached to a bulk container, such as
a case, of multiple units. They show the product number, product description, and the
number of units inside the case, and contain a barcode often representing the product
number and the quantity. To print overstock labels, follow any of the procedures in
Printing Overstock (Case) Labels on page 280.
SCC-14 labels These are industry-standard labels with an SCC-14 barcode to identify
the product. To print SCC-14 labels, follow the procedure in Printing SCC-14 Barcode
Labels on page 285.
PRINTING PRODUCT (UNIT) LABELS
You can print product unit labels using the following methods:
By product. This method prints a label for a single product. Follow the procedure in
Printing Product (Unit) Labels for a Product on page 277.
By sales order. This method prints a label for all products in a sales order. Follow the
procedure in Printing Product (Unit) Labels For an Entire Sales Order on page 279.
PRINTING PRODUCT (UNIT) LABELS FOR A PRODUCT
Printing product labels by product generates any number of labels for a single product. Note
that you can also access this function from Receiving, Pull Kitting, and Finish Kits functions.
> To print product labels by product:
necessary, and press the number corresponding to Product Lbls. You are prompted to
enter the product for which you want to print product labels.
PRODUCT LBLS
Product:
>
2. Scan the products existing barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER.
If your system is configured to disallow consolidation of inventory for different POs,

expiry dates, or received dates, you are prompted to enter the bin in which the product is
currently stored.
PRODUCT LBLS
Product:
LF551
Breathsavers Spearmi
Bin:
2 7 7
3. Scan the bins barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER, or simply press
ENTER to leave the bin field blank. You are prompted to enter a customer SKU for this
product.
PRODUCT LBLS
Product:
? >LF551
SKU#:
4. If you want to print the customers product number on this label, enter the number and
press ENTER; otherwise, press ENTER to leave this field blank. If you are prompted to enter
a packsize and/or a number of packs (for packaged/bagged goods), enter the desired
values at the prompts and press ENTER each time. Otherwise, a default of 1 is displayed for
each value, and you are prompted to enter the number of labels you need to print for this
product.
PRODUCT LBLS
Product:
? >LF551
SKU#:
Pack Qty: 25
# Packs: 1
#Labels:
5. At the #Labels prompt, enter the number of product labels you want, and press ENTER.
The labels are printed, and you are returned to the Print Labels menu.
6. To print product labels for additional products, repeat steps 1 to 5.
7. To exit label printing functions, press [F1]. You are returned to the main menu.
PRINTING PRODUCT (UNIT) LABELS FOR AN ENTIRE

SALES ORDER
Printing product labels by order generates one label for each line in a sales order, one label for
each unit in an order, one label for each pack in an order, or one label for each pack in a carton
of a completely picked order.
> To print product labels by order:
necessary, and press the number corresponding to Product Lbls - Entire Order. You
are prompted to enter order number for which you want to print product labels.
PRODUCT LBLS
Order Number:
2. Enter the order number and press ENTER. You are prompted to select the method by which
you want to print product labels for this order.
PRODUCT LBLS
Order Number:
195
1- Label/Line
2- Label/Item
3- Label/Pack
4- Label/Carton
2 7 9
3. Press the number corresponding to the option you want:
Option Prints...
1 1 label for each line in the order.
2 1 label for each unit in the order (based on the first size or unit default).
3 1 label for each pack in the order.
4 1 label for each pack in a carton (can only be printed for a fully picked
order).
Your product labels are printed and you are returned to the Order Number prompt.
4. To print product labels for additional orders, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. To exit the Product Label for an Entire Order printing function, press ENTER. Then press
[F1] to return to the main menu.
PRINTING OVERSTOCK (CASE) LABELS
You can print overstock labels using the following methods:
By product. This method prints a label for a single product. Follow the procedure in
Printing Overstock (Case) Labels for a Product below.
By sales order. This method prints a label for all products in a sales order. Follow the
procedure in Printing Overstock (Case) Labels for an Entire Sales Order on page 282.
By bin. This method prints a label for all products in a bin. Follow the procedure in
Printing Overstock (Case) Labels for a Bin on page 284.
PRINTING OVERSTOCK (CASE) LABELS FOR A PRODUCT
Printing overstock labels by product generates any number of labels for a caseload of a single
product.
> To print overstock labels by product:
necessary, and press the number corresponding to Overstock Lbls. You are prompted to
enter the product for which you want to print overstock labels.
OVERSTOCK LBLS
Product:
>
2. Scan the products existing barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER.
You are prompted to enter the packsize for which you want to print overstock labels.
OVERSTOCK LBLS
Product:
>LF211
Spearmint Gum
Q per Label:
(Default 1)
2 8 1
3. At the Q per Label prompt, enter the packsize for the case you want to label and press
ENTER. You are prompted to enter the number of labels you want to print.
OVERSTOCK LBLS
Product:
>LF211
Spearmint Gum
Q per Label:12
#Labels:
4. At the #Labels prompt, enter the number of overstock labels you want to print and press
ENTER. Your labels are printed, and you are returned to the product selection prompt.
5. To print overstock labels for additional products, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Print Labels menu. Press [F1] to
return to the main menu.
PRINTING OVERSTOCK (CASE) LABELS FOR AN ENTIRE

SALES ORDER
Printing overstock labels by order generates one label for each line in a sales order, one label
for each unit in an order, or one label for each pack in a carton of a completely picked order.
> To print overstock labels by order:
necessary, and press the number corresponding to Overstock Lbls - Entire Order. You
are prompted to enter the sales order number for which you want to print overstock labels.
OVERSTOCK
Order Number:
2. Enter the order number and press ENTER. You are prompted to select the method by which
you want to print overstock labels for this order.
OVERSTOCK
Order Number:
195
1- Label/Line
2- Label/Item
3- Label/Carton
Option Prints...
1 1 label for each line in the order.
2 1 label for each unit in the order (based on the first size or unit default).
3 1 label for each pack in a carton (can only be printed for a fully picked
order).
Your overstock labels are printed and you are returned to the Order Number prompt.
4. To print overstock labels for additional orders, repeat steps 2 and 3.
2 8 3
PRINTING OVERSTOCK (CASE) LABELS FOR A BIN
Printing overstock labels by bin generates one label for each product in a bin or one label for
each unit in a bin.
> To print overstock labels by bin:
necessary, and press the number corresponding to Overstock Lbls - By Bin. You are
prompted to enter the bin for which you want to print overstock labels.
OVERSTOCK
Bin:
2. Scan the bins barcode label, or enter the bin number, and press ENTER. You are prompted
to select the method by which you want to print overstock labels for this bin.
OVERSTOCK
Bin: BULK1
1 Each Product
2 Each Unit
Option Prints...
1 1 label for each different product in the bin. For example, if there are two
different products in the bin, 2 labels will be printed.
2 1 label for each unit of all products in the bin. For example, if there are 2
products, each with 2 cartons of 2500 units, 10,000 labels will be printed.
Your overstock labels are printed and you are returned to the bin selection prompt.
4. To print overstock labels for additional bins, repeat steps 2 and 3.
PRINTING SCC-14 BARCODE LABELS
Before you can print SCC-14 labels, barcode references must exist in the RADIO BEACON
WMS database for the products for which you want to print these labels. You can create
barcode references from the handheld if you have permission; for information, see Setting,
Modifying, or Deleting Product Cross-References on page 360.
> To print SCC-14 labels:
necessary, and press the number corresponding to SCC 14 Labels. You are prompted to
enter the product for which you want to print SCC-14 labels.
SCC 14 LABELS
Product:
2 8 5
2. Scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the product number and press ENTER. You
are prompted to select the packsize for which you want to print the labels.
LF311 1/1
SCC 14:
Product:
1: 25-Juicy Fruit
2: 100-Juicy Fruit
3. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of packsizes, press the number
corresponding to the desired packsize and press ENTER. The SCC-14 number is displayed,
and you are prompted for the number of labels you want to print.
SCC 14 LABELS
100-Juicy Fruit
SCC 14:
442295.00
#Labels:
4. At the #Labels prompt, enter the desired number of labels, and press ENTER. The labels are
printed, and you are returned to the product selection prompt.
5. To print SCC-14 labels for additional products, repeat steps 2 to 4.
PRINTING LICENSE PLATES

When you create a new license plate in the warehouse, you can usually scan a carton label or
track-trace number and use that as the license plate. However, if you are creating new license
plate numbers, you can use the license plate print function to print a label for the next
sequential licence plate number (for example L00000026, L00000027, L00000028). Then
when you license plate products in the warehouse, you can scan the license plate label you
printed. See Creating License Plates on page 383.
Note: There is no license plate reprint function. The license plate print function prints a new
license plate each time it prints a license plate label.
> To print license plates:
necessary, and press the number corresponding to License Plates. You are prompted to
enter the number of license plates you want to print.
PRINT LICENSE PLATES
# LAbels:
2. Enter the number of unique license plates to print. For example entering 2 will print the
next unused license plate number and the number after that.
When you enter the number of labels, your licence plates are printed and you are returned
to the Print Labels menu.
3. Press [F1] to return to the main menu.
2 8 7
REPRINTING ASN SSCC-18 FORMAT LABELS

ASN receiving requires SSCC-18 shipping labels created by your suppliers using the RADIO
VPCD
BEACON Vendor Portal. During the receiving process in the warehouse, you can optionally
reprint the ASN carton labels (in SSCC-18 format labels) that were originally created by
suppliers using Vendor Portal. This may be necessary, for example, if the original label was
damaged.
> To reprint the ASN (SSC-18 format) track-trace labels:
The Receiving menu is displayed.
2. From the Receiving menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if
necessary, and press the number corresponding to RePrint SSCC18-ASN. You are
prompted to enter the carton for which you want to reprint the ASN SSCC-18 label.
REPRINT SSCC_18-ASN
TotLabel #:
3. At the Totlabel # prompt, scan the existing ASN SSCC-18 label for the carton, or
enter the carton number and press ENTER. Your label is printed.
4. To reprint ASN SSCC-18 labels for additional cartons, repeat step 3.
5. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Receiving menu.
REPRINTING PICKING/SHIPPING LABELS

You can reprint picking/shipping labels after you have begun picking an order, by using the
Reprint SSCC-18 function in the Repack menu. This function prints a generic or carrier-
specific label.
Note: You should only use this function to replace an existing label if it was damaged. To
print additional labels for new shipping cartons, use the [F7] function available from
Picking, Repacking, and Add to Pallet functions.
> To print an additional picking/shipping label:
The Picking menu is displayed.
2. From the Picking menu, press the number corresponding to Repack. The Repack menu
displays.
and press the number corresponding to RePrint SSCC18. You are prompted to enter
the carton for which you want to reprint a picking/shipping label.
REPRINT SSCC-18-SHIP
TotLabel #:
2 8 9
4. At the TotLabel # prompt, scan the existing picking/shipping label for the carton, or enter
the carton number and press ENTER.
# Labels:
5. At the # Labels prompt, enter the number of labels you want to print for this carton and
press ENTER. Your label(s) is printed and a message displays.
TotLabel #:
Label Printed!
6. To reprint picking/shipping labels for additional cartons, repeat steps 4-5.
REPRINTING PAPER PACKSLIPS

Crystal Reports packslips are typically printed automatically after orders have been picked, if
your warehouse uses them. However, you can manually reprint a paper packslip generated by
Crystal Reports with the Reprint Packslip function.
> To reprint a paper packslip:
1. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Shipping. The Shipping menu is
displayed.
2. Press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and press the number
corresponding to Reprint Packslip. You are prompted to choose a the type of packslip to
print.
REPRINT PACKSLIP
1- Paper Packslip
2- Label Packslip
3. Type the number corresponding to the packslip you want to print and press ENTER. You are
prompted to enter the carton/order for which you want to reprint a packslip.
REPRINT PACKSLIP
Carton:
Scan carton label

or enter packing
slip #
4. Scan the picking/shipping label of any carton in the order, or enter the carton number or
order number and press ENTER. The packslip is printed.
5. To reprint packslips for additional orders, repeat step 4.
2 9 1
PRINTING SHIPPING CARTON LABELS

Shipping carton labels are typically printed automatically after orders have been picked.
However, you can also use the handheld to generate additional labels. The following types of
labels are available:
Carton contents label
This type of label is associated with a specific carton, and lists the shipping serial number
of the carton, and all the products contained in it. Use this type of label when you are
handling orders containing a single carton; you only need to label one of the cartons; or
you do not need to indicate the number of cartons in the order. Follow the procedure in
Printing Single Carton Contents Labels on page 293.
Numbered (N/M) carton contents label
This type of label is associated with a specific carton, lists the serial number of the carton
and all the products contained in it, and is automatically numbered for each carton in an
order. (For example, the numbered content label of the third carton in an order of five
cartons would be numbered 3/5.) Use this type of label for orders containing multiple
cartons when you need to label all the cartons and you need to indicate the total number of
cartons in the order. Follow the procedure in Printing Numbered Carton Contents
Labels on page 294.
Carton summary label
This type of label lists the order number, and the total number of cartons, lines and units in
the order. One label is printed for each order. Follow the procedure in Printing Summary
Labels on page 295.
PRINTING SINGLE CARTON CONTENTS LABELS
This procedure prints one label for a single carton in an order.
> To generate a single carton contents label:
necessary, and press the number corresponding to Content Label. You are prompted to
enter the number of the carton for which you want to print a label.
CONTENT LABEL
Carton:
2. Scan the cartons picking/shipping label, or enter the carton number and press ENTER. The
label is printed, and the order, number of lines and units in the carton are displayed.
CONTENT LABEL
Carton:
Order: 196
Lines: 2
Units: 500
Label Printed
3. To print contents labels for additional cartons, repeat step 2.
2 9 3
PRINTING NUMBERED CARTON CONTENTS LABELS
This procedure prints numbered content labels for every carton in an order.
> To generate numbered contents labels:
necessary, and press the number corresponding to N/M Contents. You are prompted to
enter a carton in the order for which you want to print numbered contents labels.
N/M CONTENTS
Carton:
2. Scan the picking/shipping label of any carton in the order, or enter the carton number and
press ENTER. A label is printed for every carton in the order, and the order, number of lines
and units in the entire order are displayed.
N/M CONTENTS
Carton:
Order: 196
Lines: 2
Units: 500
Cartn: 1
Label Printed
3. To print numbered contents labels for additional orders, repeat step 2.
PRINTING SUMMARY LABELS
This procedure prints one label per order.
> To generate summary labels:
necessary, and press the number corresponding to Summary Label. You are prompted to
enter a carton in the order for which you want to print a summary label.
CARTON SUMMARY
Carton:
2. Scan the picking/shipping label of any carton in the order, or enter the carton number and
press ENTER. A summary of the cartons, lines, and units in the order is displayed, and the
label is printed.
CARTON SUMMARY
Carton:
Order: 197
Lines: 2
Units: 500
Cartn: 1
3. To print summary labels for additional orders, repeat step 2.
2 9 5
PRINTING PLACARD LABELS

Order placard labels number each pallet in an order, with shipping and packslip information.
For example, the placard label of the third pallet in an order of five pallets would be numbered
3/5. However, the label is not associated with any specific pallet. You can use this type of label
when you want to identify all of the pallets in an order, but want to choose how the pallets are
to be numbered.
To create order placard labels, you must have already generated pallet labels for an order.
> To print order placard labels:
necessary, and press the number corresponding to Placard Labels. You are prompted to
enter the order number for which you want to print placard labels.
PLACARD LABELS
Order#:
2. Scan a picking/shipping label for one of the pallets in the order, or enter the order number
and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter the total number of pallets in the order.
PLACARD LABELS
100000009
# Pallets:
3. Enter the number of pallets in the order and press ENTER. Placard labels are printed for
each pallet, for the number of pallets you specified.
4. To print placard labels for additional orders, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Print Labels menu.
2 9 7
10 COUNTING INVENTORY
UNDERSTANDING INVENTORY COUNTING

FUNCTIONS
Once your warehouse is in production, discrepancies between the inventory reported by the
system and the actual inventory stored in the warehouse can occur because of unreported
damage to products, unrecorded changes in the system, theft of product, or procedural errors.
For this reason, you need to physically verify inventory on a cyclical basis.
You can perform two types of counts:
Cycle counting
Cycle counting is a regular, routine procedure which you use to count a limited amount of
stock. Cycle counting can be performed at any time, concurrently with all other warehouse
operations. You can also use cycle counting to add or remove stock from bins, if your
warehouse does not use miscellaneous adjustments. To perform a cycle count, follow any
of the procedures in Performing a Cycle Count on page 301.
Full stock counting
Full stock counting is a wall-to-wall count of the entire inventory in the warehouse. Your
company may perform a full stock count once when you first set up RADIO BEACON
WMS, or on a regular interval, such as annually. Full stock counting requires that the
entire system be shut down, and is therefore usually only performed outside of regular
warehouse operations. Stock counting with the RF handhelds is performed in conjunction
with the Inventory Count Wizard, which is run by a manager in RFBase. To perform a full
stock first count or recount, follow the procedures provided in Performing a Full Stock
Count on page 308.
2 9 9
Note: You cannot use any of the cycle counting functions to add product with a new non-
ATT unique attribute number, such as a lot number, that the system does not already
recognize. If you need to do so, you will need to use the Receiving or Miscellaneous
Adjustments functions.
Regardless of the type of count you wish to perform, the general procedure for counting
inventory is as follows:
1. Identify the type of count you want to perform. To perform a cycle count, select any of the
methods described in Performing a Cycle Count on page 301. To perform a full stock
first count or recount, select the appropriate option described in Performing a Full Stock
Count on page 308.
2. Go to the appropriate bin and count all the products in the bin, by using any of the
methods described in Counting Products in a Bin on page 313.
3. Complete the count in any of the following cases:
When you have finished counting a non-dedicated, random, or carton bin (these are
all bins which can store more than one product).
When you have performed a cycle count by product, and have found fewer items in
the bin than the system expected.
When you have counted a dedicated bin (this is a bin which can store only one
product), and have found fewer items in the bin than the system expected.
Follow the procedure in Completing a Count on page 320.
4. Repeat the procedure until you have counted all the bins you need to count.
You can also stop and restart a bin count at any time; for information, see Stopping and
Restarting a Count on page 322.
3 0 0 CHAP TER 10 C O U N T I N G I N V E N T O R Y
All of the functions described in this chapter are available through the Cycle Count menu.
> To access the Cycle Count menu:
1. From the main menu, if necessary, press ENTER to display the second screen of functions.
2. From the main menu, press the number corresponding to Cycle Count. The Cycle Count
menu is displayed.
CYCLE COUNT
1- By Date
2- By Product
3- By Bin
3- Full Count
PERFORMING A CYCLE COUNT

You can initiate a cycle count according to the following criteria:
By bin
This is the most common method of cycle counting. This method allows you to select the
first bin to count, and then moves to the next bin according to bin sequence and zone
sequence (if you are using multiple zones). You generally use this method to count the
same bins over and over again in the same area of your warehouse (for example, those that
contain fast moving products), or to allow multiple counters to cycle count in different
aisles of the same zones so they do not overlap. Follow the procedure in Cycle Counting
by Bin on page 302.
3 0 1
By date
This method counts all the bins in a zone, in the sequence in which they were last counted,
from least recent to most recent. You can use this method when you want to count all bins
in a zone over cyclical periods. Or you might use this method if only one person is cycle
counting and cannot cycle-count an entire area in a single day. If your system supports
multiple clients/companies, you can also use this method to count only the products of a
specific client. Follow the procedure in Cycle Counting by Date on page 304.
By product
This method counts all the bins containing a specific product. You can use this method
when you want to verify quantities and locations of a single product. Follow the procedure
in Cycle Counting by Product on page 306.
You may also be prompted to count products by A, B, or C class, where these letters designate
different groupings of products according to their sales value. In the procedures in this manual,
ABC counting is not used.
CYCLE COUNTING BY BIN
When you cycle count by bin, you identify the first bin you want to count. After that, the
system directs you to each sequential bin, by zone. You can also skip any bin you dont want to
count.
> To cycle count by bin:
1. From the Cycle Count menu, press 3 to select By Bin. You are prompted to enter the first
bin you want to count.
CYCLE COUNT
By Bin
First Bin:
>
2. Go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or at the First Bin prompt, enter the bin number
and press ENTER. If you enter a bin that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the
bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, the cycle count begins at
the next sequential bin from the bin that you entered.
The date this bin was last counted.

BY BIN C1
Last: 07/24/2003
Expected: 2/17 The total number of packs of all
PRODUCT: products expected in this bin.
f9-Complete The total number of different products/

packsizes expected in this bin.
3. If you want to skip counting this bin, press [F2]. Otherwise, continue by following the
procedures in Counting Products in a Bin on page 313.
4. Repeat the process until you have counted all the bins you are assigned to count.
5. When you are finished, do any of the following:
To return to the Cycle Count menu to perform another type of cycle count, press [F1].
To exit cycle counting, press [F1] twice.
3 0 3
CYCLE COUNTING BY DATE
When you cycle count by date, you count the bins in a specific zone, starting with the bin that
was counted last.
3PL If your warehouse supports multiple client/companies, you can also use this method to count
only the products that belong to a single client.
> To cycle count by date:
1. From the Cycle Count menu, press 1 to select By Date.
3PL If your warehouse supports multiple clients/companies, you are prompted to enter the
If you want to count only the products for a specific client, enter the client name/
If you want to count the products for all clients, simply press ENTER.
ZONE If there are multiple zones defined for your warehouse, you are prompted to enter the zone
you want to count. At the Zone prompt, enter the zone.
You are directed to the bin (in the zone you selected) that has not been counted for the
longest period of time.

BY DATE C1
Last: 07/24/2003

2. Go to the bin, and continue by following the procedures in Counting Products in a Bin
on page 313.
3. Repeat the process until you have counted all the bins to which you are directed. When
you have counted all the bins, a message is displayed (if your warehouse uses multiple
zones, the zone that you selected in step 1 is displayed).
CYCLE COUNT Date

Bins already
counted today
Enter - Continue
4. Press ENTER to return to the first cycle count by date screen.

ZONE
If you are using multiple zones, and want to count by date in more zones, repeat this
procedure.
3 0 5
CYCLE COUNTING BY PRODUCT
When you count by product, you are directed to every bin containing that product, by bin
sequence and zone sequence (if your warehouse uses multiple zones). You are only required to
count the product you have selected, regardless of other products that are stored in a bin. You
can also skip any bin you dont want to count.
> To cycle count by product:
1. From the Cycle Count menu, press 2 to select By Product. You are prompted to identify
the product you want to count.
CYCLE COUNT
By Product
>
2. Scan the barcode label of the product, or enter the product, and press ENTER.
You are directed to the first sequential bin containing the product.

BY PRODUCT C1
Last: 07/24/2003
Expected: 1/10 The total number of packs of this
PRODUCT: product expected in this bin.
f9-Complete The total number of different packsizes

expected in this bin.
3. If you want to skip counting this bin, press [F2]. Otherwise, go to the bin and continue by
following the procedures for counting a bin in Counting Products in a Bin on page 313.
4. Repeat the process until you have counted all the bins to which you are directed. When
you have counted all the bins, a message is displayed.
CYCLE COUNT PRODUCT

No bins left
for product
LF311
Enter - Continue
5. Press ENTER to return to the first cycle count by product screen.
To count more products, repeat this procedure.
3 0 7
PERFORMING A FULL STOCK COUNT

Full stock counting involves the following steps:
First count
This step is always performed. In the first count, you select each bin you want to count.
Some warehouses perform two first counts before doing a recount. Follow the procedure
in Performing a Full Stock Count on page 308.
Recount
This step is performed if inventory discrepancies are serious enough to warrant recounting
particular bins. In a recount, you are directed by the system to count only those bins that
showed the discrepancies, in their bin sequence. Follow the procedure in Performing a
Recount on page 311.
Note: You should not begin a full first count or recount until the Inventory Count Wizard
has been run in RFBase. For more information, see your warehouse supervisor.
PERFORMING THE FIRST COUNT
When you perform the first count, you select each bin you want to count.
> To perform a full count:
1. From the Cycle Count menu, press 4 to select Full Count. The Full Count menu is
displayed.
FULL COUNT
1- First Count
2- Recount
2. From the Full Count menu, press 1 to select First Count.
3PL If your warehouse supports multiple clients/companies, you are prompted to enter the
If you want to count only the products for a specific client, enter the client name/
If you want to count the products for all clients, simply press ENTER.
You are prompted to enter the first bin you want to count.
FULL COUNT
Full Count
BIN:
>
3 0 9
3. Go to the bin and scan its barcode label, or at the First Bin prompt, enter the bin number
and press ENTER. If you enter a bin that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the
bin, press Y to add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you press N, the cycle count begins at
the next sequential bin from the bin that you entered.

FC 1ST C1
Last: 07/24/2003

4. Continue by following the procedures in Counting Products in a Bin on page 313. When
you have counted a bin, you are prompted to identify the next bin you want to count.
5. Repeat the procedure until you have counted all the bins you are assigned to count.
6. When you are finished, press [F1] twice to exit the count function.
PERFORMING A RECOUNT
When you perform a recount, you identify the first bin from which you would like to begin
counting. You are directed to each bin that was found to show a discrepancy between the
initial/book count and the current inventory that exceeded the specified variance, in bin and
zone sequence.
> To perform a recount:
1. From the Cycle Count menu, press 4 to select Full Count. The Full Count menu is
displayed.
FULL COUNT
1- First Count
2- Recount
2. From the Full Count menu, press 2 to select Recount. You are prompted to enter the first
bin you want to count.
FULL COUNT
Recount
First Bin:
>
3 1 1
3. At the First Bin prompt, scan the bins barcode label, or enter the bin number and press
ENTER. You are directed to the first bin that has been marked for recounting.
The date of the first full count.

FC RECOUNT A1
Last: 07/24/2003
The total number of packs of all
Expected: 1/6
products expected in this bin.
PRODUCT:
The total number of different products/

f9-Complete packsizes expected in this bin.
4. Go to the bin, and continue by following the procedures in Counting Products in a Bin
on page 313.
5. Repeat the process until you have counted all the bins to which you are directed.When you
have counted all the bins marked for recounting, a message is displayed.
FULL COUNT Recount

There are no
more bins
past: WORK4
Enter - Continue
6. Press ENTER to return to the first recount screen.
7. To exit the count function, press [F1] twice.
COUNTING PRODUCTS IN A BIN

Once you have selected the method of counting bins, you also have two modes of counting the
products stored in those bins:
By quantity This is the default mode, in which you scan or enter a product once, count
the packs, and enter the quantity you counted. Steps for counting by quantity are provided
in Counting by Quantity on page 314.
By each In this mode, you are never prompted to enter a count. Instead, you scan or
enter each pack of a product, and the quantity is increased by one for each scan. This
method is useful when units of the same product are not grouped together in the bin and it
is easier to count each product individually rather than trying to count a set of items at the
same time and then entering a quantity. Steps for counting by quantity are provided in
Counting by Each on page 317.
You can toggle back and forth between Count by Quantity and Count by Each modes by
pressing [F5].
In addition, if you have the appropriate permission, you can display a list of expected products
for each bin, from which you can view (and select) the products to count, as well as toggling
between Count by Quantity and Count by Each modes. This may be useful when you want to
see what additional products the system expects, when you believe you have finished counting
a bin.
You can also interrupt and restart a count at any time. You will need to do so if multiple
counters are counting the same bin. For procedures, see Stopping and Restarting a Count on
page 322.
Note: For warehouses that use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation,
these conditions impose restrictions on the products you can count into bins. For
example, if your warehouse stores products using single homes, you cannot count a
product into a pick bin if it is already stored in another one.
3 1 3
COUNTING BY QUANTITY
Count By Quantity is the default mode, in which you only need to scan one product once,
count the number of packs, and enter your count.
> To count products by quantity:

At the PRODUCT prompt, scan the barcode At the PRODUCT prompt, press [F4] to
label of the first product you want to display a list of expected products. The
count, or enter the product number and products and expected quantities and
press ENTER. packsizes are displayed.
C3 1/1
Select Prod:
1:LF311 3*100
2:LF522 7*25
3:LF600 2*100

products, if necessary, and press the
number corresponding to the product and
packsize you want to count first.
If the system expects to find the product there, and the product is only stored in one
packsize, the product and expected packsize are displayed, and you are prompted to count
the product. Continue by following step 2.
C1
Expected: 2/17
LF211
Spearmint Gum
Packsize:25
Quantity:
If the system does not expect to find the product in the bin, or if the product is stored in the
bin in more than one packsize, you are prompted to select a packsize for the product you
entered.
C1
Expected: 2/17
LF408
Tic Tac Freshmint
Packsize:
(Default:2500)
At the Packsize prompt, enter the packsize of the product in the bin, and press ENTER.
2. Count the number of packs, and at the Quantity prompt, enter the quantity you counted
and press ENTER.
Note: You do not have to enter the total quantity at once. If you count the product multiple
times for the bin, each quantity is added to the previously counted quantity.
If the system does not expect to find the product in the bin, the message Not Expected! is
displayed, and you are prompted to confirm that you want to add the product to the bin.
Press Y to add the product or N to cancel.
3 1 5
If you counted more units of a product/packsize than the system expected to find in the
bin, the message Too Many! appears, with the surplus quantity reported, and you are
prompted to confirm that you want to add the full total to the bin. Press Y to add the items
or N to cancel.
If you are counting by product and it is only stored in one packsize in the bin, or if the bin
you counted is a dedicated bin, and you did not count less than the system expected, you
are automatically directed to the next bin to count. Repeat any of the counting procedures
to count the bin.
you counted is a dedicated bin (that is, a bin that can only contain one product), and you
have counted fewer items than the system expected, complete the count by following the
procedure in Completing a Count on page 320.
If you are counting by any other method, and the bin is a non-dedicated, random, or carton
bin, you are returned to the product prompt. If you have the appropriate permission, the
expected numbers are decreased accordingly. Continue to the next step.
enter the number and press ENTER. If the number is not recognized, and you are prompted
to add the number, press Y to add it, or press N to scan/enter the number again. If you are
then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and
press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are counting in this bin.
4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each different product in a non-dedicated, random, or carton bin
(unless you are counting by product).
5. When you have finished counting all products in the bin, complete the count by following
the procedure in Completing a Count on page 320.
COUNTING BY EACH
In Count By Each mode, you must scan each pack in the bin rather than entering a quantity.
Each time you scan or enter an item, the count is automatically is increased by one.
To start Count by Each mode, you press [F5] from the first cycle counting screen; to return to
the regular Count By Qty mode, press [F5] again.
> To count products by each:
1. At the PRODUCT prompt, press [F5]. You are switched to counting by each mode.
C2
Last: 07/24/2003
Expected: 2/12
PRODUCT(Each):
f9-Complete
At the PRODUCT prompt, scan the barcode At the PRODUCT prompt, press [F4] to
label of the first product you want to display a list of expected products. The
count, or enter the product number and products and expected quantities and
press ENTER. packsizes are displayed.
C3 1/1
Select Prod:
1:LF311 3*100
2:LF522 7*25
3:LF600 2*100

products, if necessary, and press the
number corresponding to the product and
packsize you want to count first.
3 1 7
If the system expects to find the product there, and the product is only stored in one
packsize, the system automatically counts 1 pack of the product. If you have the
appropriate permission, the expected numbers are decreased accordingly. Continue by
following step 4.
enter the number and press ENTER. If the number is not recognized, and you are prompted
to add the number, press Y to add it, or press N to scan/enter the number again. If you are
then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate number and
press ENTER. Repeat this step for each unit you are counting in this bin.
If the system does not expect to find the product in the bin, or if the product is stored in the
bin in more than one packsize, you are prompted to select a packsize for the product you
entered.
C2
Last: 07/24/2003
Expected: 2/12
LF522
Big Red
Packsize:
(Default:2500)
At the Packsize prompt, enter the packsize of the product in the bin, and press ENTER.
If the system does not expect to find the product in the bin, the message Not Expected! is
displayed, and you are prompted to confirm that you want to add the product to the bin.
Press Y to add the product or N to cancel.
4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have counted all remaining packs of this product.
If you counted more than the system expected to find in the bin, the message Too Many!
appears, with the surplus quantity reported, and you are prompted to confirm that you
want to add the full total to the bin. Press Y to add the items or N to cancel.
you counted is a dedicated bin, and you did not count less than the system expected, you
are automatically directed to the next bin to count. Repeat any of the counting procedures
to count the bin.
you counted is a dedicated bin, and you have counted fewer items than the system
expected, complete the count by following the procedure in Completing a Count on
page 320.
If you are counting by any other method, and the bin is a non-dedicated, random, or carton
bin, you are returned to the product prompt. If you have the appropriate permission, the
expected numbers are decreased accordingly. Continue to the next step.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each different product in a non-dedicated, random, or carton bin
(unless you are counting by product).
6. When you have finished counting all products in the bin, complete the count by following
the procedure in Completing a Count on page 320.
3 1 9
COMPLETING A COUNT
You need to complete a count in any of the following instances:
When you have finished counting a non-dedicated, random, or carton bin (these are bins
which can store multiple products).
When you have finished counting the product in a dedicated bin (this is a bin which can
only store a single product), and the quantity you found in the bin is less than what the
system expected.
When you have finished a cycle count by product, and the quantity you found in the bin is
less than what the system expected.
Note: If you are among several people counting the same bin, and you are not the last
counter, you should not complete the count, but stop it; for procedures, see Stopping
a Count on page 322.
> To complete a count:
1. After finishing counting the product(s) in the bin, press [F9]. If your count matches, or is
greater than, the count the system expects, you are directed to the next bin to count. If you
counted less than the quantity expected by the system for any product, you are prompted
to confirm that the uncounted items are to be deleted.
C2
Expected : 2/12
You counted less
products than
expected. OK to
delete rest?
(Y/N)
If you are confident in If you want to recount the If you want to cancel the
your count and want to products in this bin, press count for this bin and skip
remove the extra products, N. You are prompted to to the next bin, press N.
press Y. You are prompted cancel the count for this You are prompted to
to confirm the deletion. bin. cancel the count for this
bin.
C2 C2
Uncounted: 2/12 C2
Is it OK to quit
Are you sure you counting Is it OK to quit
want to delete this bin? counting
any uncounted (Y/N) this bin?
products? (Y/N)
(Y/N)
Press Y. If you are Press N. You are returned

performing a first full to the first screen. To Press Y. If you are
count, you will be recount the bin, repeat any performing a first full
prompted to identify the of the procedures for count, you will be
next bin to count; counting a bin. prompted to identify the
otherwise you will be next bin to count;
directed to the next bin. otherwise you will be
directed to the next bin.
3. Continue by doing any of the following:
To count the next bin, follow any of the procedures in Counting Products in a Bin
on page 313.
If you are performing a full stock first count, identify the next bin to count, and follow
any of the procedures in Counting Products in a Bin on page 313.
If you are cycle counting by bin or product, and want to skip the bin, press [F2].
To quit counting, press [F1] to return to the main Cycle Count menu.
3 2 1
STOPPING AND RESTARTING A COUNT

You can stop a bin count at any time. You can also restart your own or someone elses bin
count. Since several people can count the same non-dedicated, random or carton bin at the
same time (but not the same products), all counters except the last should stop the count, and
not complete it. When the last count is done, that counter can then complete the count, as
described in Completing a Count on page 320
To stop a count, see the procedure in Stopping a Count on page 322. To restart a non-
completed count, see the procedure in Restarting a Count on page 323.
STOPPING A COUNT
When you stop a count, you have the choice of cancelling the counts you performed so far, or
of saving them for the person who will resume the count.
> To stop or interrupt a bin count:
1. At any point during a count, press [F1]. If you have not yet counted any product, you are
returned to the main Cycle Count menu. If you have already counted some product in the
bin, you are prompted to save the counts.
C3
Someones count
was interrupted.
Reset the counts

and count the
bin again?
(Y/N)
If you want to give the next counter the option of starting the count over or of
resuming where you left off, press N. (This is the recommended option.) The next
counter will receive the same message, and can select the appropriate option, as
described in Restarting a Count on page 323.
If you want to cancel all counts that you made, and force the next counter to start the
count over again, press Y.
You are returned to the main Cycle Count menu.
RESTARTING A COUNT
If you arrive at a bin for which a previous counter interrupted the count but opted to save the
counts s/he made so far, you are prompted to restart the count.
C3
Someones count
was interrupted.
Reset the counts

and count the
bin again?
(Y/N)
3 2 3
> To restart the bin count:
If you want to keep the counts that the previous counter performed, and count only
the remaining products and quantities, press N. (This is the recommended option.)
You are prompted to begin counting the products that were not counted during the last
count.
If you want to cancel the counts that the previous counter performed, and start the
count over again, press Y. You are prompted to begin counting the first product.
If you are not sure what to do, and would prefer to skip the bin, press [F1] again. If
you are performing a first full count, you will be prompted to identify the next bin to
count; otherwise you will be directed to the next bin.
2. Continue by following any of the procedures in Counting Products in a Bin on

page 313.
11 ADJUSTING INVENTORY
UNDERSTANDING ADJUSTMENTS
You can add stock to or remove stock from the warehouse for reasons other than receiving or
picking orders, by using a miscellaneous adjustment. For example, your warehouse might use
miscellaneous adjustments to deal with sample products, customer returns, and damaged
goods. Your system will be configured to allow certain types of miscellaneous adjustments,
which may include any of the following:
Adjustment Code Keeps track of...
Borrowed BS Removal and subsequent addition of products that are lent or

Stock borrowed.
Customer RC Addition of stock returned by customers.

Returns
Damaged DG Removal of damaged stock.

Goods
Destroyed in DF Removal of stock destroyed outside of the warehouse.

Field
Donations DN Removal of stock given away as a donation.
Front Counter FC Removal of stock for front-counter orders. This uploads a

miscellaneous adjustment record to the accounting system,
rather than the usual picking confirmation record uploaded by
the handheld Front Counter Picking function (see Entering
Sales Orders on page 211 for more information).
Internal Memo IM Removal or addition of stock for an internal memo.
3 2 5
Internal Use IU Removal or addition of stock for internal use.
Non-PO RV Addition of stock not listed on a PO. This is similar to the non-
Receiving PO receiving (see Receiving without a Purchase Order on
page 45 for more information), but can be used in warehouses
that do not normally allow non-PO receiving.
Packaging PK Addition or removal of packaging materials, such as cartons or

shrink-wrap.
Promotion PR Addition or removal of promotional materials, such as flyers or

brochures.
Receiving RE Addition or removal of stock to fix receiving errors.

Errors
Repairs RP Removal and subsequent addition of products that are being

repaired.
RMAs RM Addition of stock received as an RMA. This is similar to the

(Returned RMA receiving (see Receiving by RMA on page 26 for more
Materials information), but can be used in warehouses that do not
Authorization) normally use RMA receiving.
Samples, MA Addition or removal of stock used as samples, or for reasons not

Other covered by other adjustments.
Supplies SU Addition or removal of office supplies, such as copier paper or

cleaning supplies.
Vendor VR Removal of stock to return to the vendor.

Returns
Warehouse TR Addition or removal of stock transferred between different

Transfer locations.
Work-In- WP Addition or removal of stock transferred to/from the work area

Progress of the warehouse.
3 2 6 CHAP TER 11 A D J U S T I N G I N V E N T O R Y
Kit assembly KA Addition or removal of components to or from the kit area, such
as items that were damaged during the kitting process.
Quality QI Removal or addition of stock that is undergoing quality

inspection inspection.
Each miscellaneous adjustment may be configured to increase or decrease the inventory, and
to upload an adjustment record to the accounting system or not.
3PL Note: If your system supports multiple clients/companies, and you are assigned to a specific
client, you will only be able to create adjustments for products assigned to that client.
ADJUSTMENTS TO LICENSE PLATES
For warehouses that use license plates, adjustments can be used for the following license plate
operations:
Creating license plates when adjusting stock into the warehouse, putting-away the
stock to a new license plate will create the license plate in RADIO BEACON WMS.
Adjust products in/out of a license plateAdjusted products can be added to/removed

from an existing license plate. The products are adjusted in/out of inventory.
License Plate Adjust OutRemoves a whole license plate at once, and adjusts the items
out of inventory. This operation is described in Adjusting License Plates Out on
page 337.
3 2 7
USING MISCELLANEOUS ADJUSTMENTS

All inventory adjustments, except adjustment of an entire license plate out of inventory,
involve the following steps:
1. Create the adjustment, and provide any information required, such as a reference number,
product number, customer name, vendor name, and/or comment for the adjustment.
Follow the procedure in Creating an Adjustment on page 328.
2. Move the inventory in or out of the warehouse. To move inventory into the warehouse,
follow the procedure in Adjusting Product Into the Warehouse on page 331. To move
inventory out of the warehouse, follow the procedure in Adjusting Product Out of the
Warehouse on page 334.
Each adjustment type may be configured to require that you provide information such as the
vendor number, customer number, a comment, an RMA code, or other data required for your
warehouse. In the procedures that follow, these prompts are not described.
To adjust an entire license plate out of inventory, follow the procedure in Adjusting License
Plates Out on page 337.
CREATING AN ADJUSTMENT
> To create an adjustment:
1. From the main menu, press ENTER to view the second screen of functions, if necessary.
2. Press the number corresponding to Misc Adjusts.
If your system supports multiple clients/companies, a list of these is displayed. If

3PL necessary, press ENTER to display additional screens, and press the number next to the
client for which you are creating the adjustment, and press ENTER.
The Adjusts menu is displayed. Your configuration will determine which adjustments are
displayed.
ADJUSTS 1/2
Select:
1:Return / Customer
2:Return / Vendor
3:Misc Adjustments
4:Repairs
5:Transfers
6:Non-PO Receipt
3. If necessary, press ENTER to view additional screens of adjustments, and press the number
corresponding to the type of adjustment you want to create. Depending on your
configuration, you may be prompted to enter the customer number, vendor number,
comment, or other information.
4. Enter any required information and press ENTER at each prompt. You are prompted to enter
a reference number for this adjustment. The reference number is used to track the
adjustment in RADIO BEACON WMS.
Return / Customer
Reference:
5. At the Reference prompt, enter a reference number for this adjustment and press ENTER,
or press [F3] if you do not need to enter a reference number. You are prompted to enter the
product you are adjusting in or out.
3 2 9
If you are using multiple clients/companies, the client name/number that you selected is
3PL also displayed.
Return / Customer
Ref:12345
PRODUCT
If a list of non-unique attributes is displayed, such as lot numbers, do one of the following:
ATT
If you are adjusting a product out, or if you are adjusting a product in and the
products attribute number matches an existing number, press the number
corresponding to the attribute number you want and press ENTER.
If you are adjusting a product in and the product has a new attribute number, press 1
and ENTER. You will be prompted to enter the lot number when you do the adjustment
in.
You are prompted to select whether you want to move the product in or out of the
warehouse.
Return / Customer
Ref:12345
LF311
Juicy Fruit
1-IN 2-OUT
7. Optionally, to print product labels for this product, press [F7], and at the # Labels prompt,
enter the number of labels you want, and press ENTER. The labels are printed and you are
returned to the adjustment in/out screen.
8. To adjust the product into the warehouse, follow the procedure in Adjusting Product Into
the Warehouse on page 331. To adjust the product out of the warehouse, follow the
procedure in Adjusting Product Out of the Warehouse on page 334.
ADJUSTING PRODUCT INTO THE WAREHOUSE
Use this function to move products into the warehouse.
Note: Pick bins have restrictions on the products you can put into them based on their type.
For example, you cannot put two different products into a dedicated pick bin. For
warehouses that use single or sticky homes, or that restrict stock consolidation, these
conditions impose additional restrictions on the products you can put into them. For
example, if your warehouse stores products using single homes, you cannot put a
For warehouses that use license plates, there are additional restrictions to consider
when creating a new license plates, or adding products to existing license plates.
There are license plate-specific rules that are applied to bins; for example, some bins
may not be configured to keep license plate information (i.e., the bin is configured to
kill license plates). There are also rules for acceptable product mixing within a bin
and/or a license plate; for example, a product cannot exist in two different packsizes
in a single license plate. Furthermore, a bin may not hold a product & packsize in
both license plate and free (non-licence plate) formats at the same time.
3 3 1
To adjust products in:
1. Create an adjustment, as described in Creating an Adjustment on page 328.
2. From the adjustment in/out screen, select 1 to move the selected product into the
warehouse. The first sequential bin in which the product is currently stored is displayed (if
applicable), and you are prompted to enter a bin into which you want to move the product.
Return / Customer
Ref:12345
BIN: C1
BIN:
LF311
Juicy Fruit
3. At the Bin prompt, do one of the following:
To select a bin, go to the bin and scan its If you want to use license plates, you need
barcode label, or at the Bin prompt, enter to enter a license plate instead of a bin.
the bin number and press ENTER. If you
enter a bin number that does not exist, and Scan or enter the license plate number and
you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to press ENTER. For an existing license plate,
add the bin or N not to add the bin. If you the screen displays the bin associated with
press N, you are prompted to enter a new the license plate.
bin.
If the license plate you entered does not
If the product cannot be accepted in this exist, you are prompted to create the new
bin, an error message is displayed. Press license plate; press Y to add the license
ENTER to return to the previous screen, and plate or N not to add the license plate. If
enter a new bin. you press Y, you are asked to assign the
license plate to bin. This is the bin into
which you will put the products. If you
press N, you are prompted to enter a new
bin, to which you can respond with a
either a bin or license plate.
If the product cannot be accepted in this bin, an error message is displayed. Press ENTER to
return to the previous screen, and enter a new bin.
4. If the bin you entered does not already contain this product, and you are prompted to
select a packsize, press the number corresponding to the packsize you want and press
ENTER, or press 6 to enter another packsize, and at the New Packsize prompt, enter the
packsize, and press ENTER.
ATT If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, you are prompted for it.
Scan the barcode containing the serial number, or enter the serial number and press ENTER.
If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate
number and press ENTER. A message appears confirming that the stock has been added,
and you are returned to the product selection prompt. Repeat the procedure from step 6 in
Creating an Adjustment for each unit of this product you want to adjust in.
Otherwise, you are prompted to enter the number of packs you want to move to this bin.
Return / Customer
Ref:12345
BIN:C1
Qty:
LF311
Juicy Fruit
PACKS of 25
Avail:0
5. At the Qty prompt, enter the number of packs you are adjusting into the warehouse, and
press ENTER.
and press ENTER, or press [F1] to skip entering an expiry date.
If this product has a non-unique attribute, such as a lot number, and you are prompted for
ATT the attribute number, scan the appropriate barcode label, or enter the attribute number and
press ENTER. If the number is not recognized, and you are prompted to add the number,
when you are prompted to add the attribute number, press Y to add it, or press N to scan/
enter the number again.
3 3 3
A message is displayed, confirming that the product has been added to the inventory, and
you are returned to the product selection prompt.
Return / Customer
Ref:12345
PRODUCT
STOCK ADDED
To move in another product using the same adjustment, scan the products barcode label,
or enter the product number and press ENTER, and repeat steps 2 to 6.
To move out another product using the same adjustment, follow steps 2 to 6 in Adjusting
Product Out of the Warehouse on page 334.
8. To exit this function, press [F1] twice. You are returned to the main menu.
ADJUSTING PRODUCT OUT OF THE WAREHOUSE
> To adjust products out:
2. From the adjustment in/out screen, select 2 to move the selected product out of the
warehouse.
If this product has a unique attribute, such as a serial number, you are prompted for it.
Scan the barcode containing the serial number, or enter the serial number and press ENTER.
If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or enter the appropriate
ATT number and press ENTER. A message appears confirming that the stock has been removed,
and you are returned to the product selection prompt. Repeat the procedure from step 6 in
Creating an Adjustment for each unit of this product you want to adjust out.
Otherwise, the bins, packsizes and quantities where the product is currently found are
displayed. Bins marked with # indicate that their stock is reserved and cannot be selected.
If the product is part of a license plate, the bin location and the license plate number are
displayed.
LF311 1/1
Select:
1:A1 2*25
2:B1 4*100
3:BULK3 5*2500
4:N02 LP1234567
3. To select a bin from which you want to move the product, scan the bins barcode label, or
press ENTER to view additional screens of bins, if necessary, and press the number
corresponding to the bin and press ENTER. If you selected a random or overstock bin, you
are prompted to select the packsize you wish to adjust.
LF311
1 - UNIT (1)
2 - SIZ2 (25)
3 - SIZ3 (100)
4 - SIZ4 (0)
5 - SIZ5 (0)
6 - OTHER
4. Press the number corresponding to the desired packsize, or press 6 to enter a new
packsize, and at the New Packsize prompt, enter the packsize, and press ENTER.
The available product in the bin is listed, and you are prompted to enter the quantity you
want to move out.
Front Counter
Ref:12345
BIN:B2
Qty:
LF311
Juicy Fruit
PACKS of 100
Avail: 6
3 3 5
5. At the Qty prompt, enter the number of units/packs and press ENTER.
If this product has a non-unique attribute, such as a lot number, and you are prompted for
ATT the attribute number, scan the appropriate barcode label, or enter the attribute number and
press ENTER. If the number is not recognized, and you are prompted to add the number,
when you are prompted to add the attribute number, press Y to add it, or press N to scan/
enter the number again. If you are then prompted for additional attribute numbers, scan or
enter the appropriate number and press ENTER.
A message appears confirming that the stock has been moved out, and you are returned to
the product selection prompt.
Front Counter
Ref:12345
PRODUCT
STOCK REMOVED
To move out another product using the same adjustment, scan the products barcode label,
or enter the product number and press ENTER, and repeat steps 2 to 5.
To move in another product using the same adjustment, follow steps 2 to 7 in Adjusting
Product Into the Warehouse on page 331.
7. To exit this function, press [F1] twice. You are returned to the main menu.
ADJUSTING LICENSE PLATES OUT
> To adjust an entire license plate out:
2. From the adjustment in/out screen, press [F2]. You are prompted for the license plate
number that you want to adjust out of inventory.
LICENSE PLATE OUT

LICENSE PLATE #
3. Scan the license plate barcode label, or enter the license plate number and press ENTER.
The bin containing the license plate and the number of different items in the license plate
are displayed. You are prompted to confirm the license plate adjustment out.
LICENSE PLATE OUT

LICENSE PLATE #
LP1234567
BIN: B007
3 Items
will be adjusted out.
Yes/No
3 3 7
4. Optionally press [F2] to display the items in the license plate. The items are listed,
showing the packsize and quantity of each item.
B007 1/1
1: LF211 12*10
2: LF312 8*1
3: LF600 5*5
Press [F1] to return to previous screen where you are prompted to confirm the license plate
adjustment out.
5. Press Y to adjust the entire license plate out of inventory; otherwise, press N and you are
returned to the LICENSE PLATE # prompt where you can scan or enter a different
license plate.
6. If you pressed Y, a confirmation of the license plate adjustment out is displayed. Press
ENTER. You are returned to the Adjusts menu, where you continue adjusting inventory or
press [F1] to return to the main menu.
12 WAREHOUSE AND PRODUCT

MAINTENANCE
The Warehouse and Product Maintenance functions allow warehouse staff with the appropriate
permissions to manage various aspects of the warehouse, including:
Adding products, if your system is configured to allow this. Described in Adding New
Viewing information for existing products. Described in Displaying Product

Information on page 343.
Setting the properties of new products, or modifying the properties of existing products.
Described in Setting or Modifying Product Properties on page 345.
Deleting products. Described in Deleting Products on page 356.
Setting or changing the default packsizes for products. Described in Setting or Modifying
Product Packsizes on page 358.
Creating product cross-references. Described in Setting, Modifying, or Deleting Product

Cross-References on page 360.
REPLEN Setting minimum/maximum replenishment levels for products (only in warehouses that
use min/max advance replenishment). Described in Setting or Modifying Replenishment
Levels on page 364.
Assigning products to bins (only in warehouses that use sticky homes). Described in
Setting or Modifying Sticky Homes on page 372.
3 3 9
All of the functions described in this chapter are available through the Warehouse Maintenance
menu.
> To access the Warehouse Maintenance menu:
From the main menu, press ENTER to go to the second screen of functions, if necessary, and
press the number corresponding to Warehouse Maint. The Warehouse Maintenance menu is
displayed.
WAREHOUSE MAINT 1/2 WAREHOUSE MAINT 2/2

1-Assign Pickbins 1:Requuest Replen
2-Bin Lookup 2:Product Maint
4-Product Xref
5-Formal Packsizes
6-Del Sticky Homes
7-Restock
Note: The options available in the Warehouse Maintenance menu will depend on your
permissions.
ADDING NEW PRODUCTS

If your system is configured to allow it, you can add new products to RADIO BEACON WMS
through the Product Maintenance function. Adding a product consists of two steps:
1. Add the product, as described below.
2. Set its properties, as described in Setting or Modifying Product Properties on page 345.
3 4 0 CHAP TER 12 W AR E H O U S E A N D P R O D U C T M A I N T E N A N C E
> To add a new product:
1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Product
Maint. You are prompted to enter an identifier for the new product.
PRODUCT MAINT
Enter Product
2. At the Enter Product prompt, enter a new product number and press ENTER. If more than
one product matches the barcode you scanned, you are prompted to select the correct
product. To select the product, follow any of the steps described in Identifying Products
on page 10.
If your warehouse is configured to track non-unique product attributes such as lot

ATT numbers, you are prompted to provide the attribute number. Scan the attribute number on
the products barcode label, or enter the attribute number and press ENTER.
By default, the type of product is as stock, with its unit of measure being each. (You
can change these, as described in subsequent steps.) You are prompted to enter the UPC
for the product.
PRODUCT MAINT
LF123
UPC>
Type: (Stock)
Unit: (EACH)
3. At the UPC prompt, scan the UPC barcode, or enter the UPC number for the product and
press ENTER; or press ENTER to skip entering a UPC.
3 4 1
4. At the Type prompt, enter the product type, according to the following valid codes, and
press ENTER; or press ENTER to accept the default, stock:
Code Explanation
S Stock item. Use this code for regular stock items.
N Non-stock item. You can use this code for promotional items, such as
flyers or brochures, or packaging items, such as shrink wrapping.
F Fabricated. You can use this code for kits or other items that must be
assembled in the warehouse.
A Guaranteed available.
5. At the Unit prompt, enter text describing the unit of measure that defines one unit of
inventory (for example, each, lb, litre), and press ENTER; or press ENTER to accept the
default, each. You are prompted to confirm the addition of this product to the system.
PRODUCT MAINT
LF123
UPC>
1234567890123
Type: (Stock)
Unit: (EACH)
CONFIRM (Y/N)
6. Press Y to add the product, or press N to cancel and return to the product entry prompt. If
you pressed Y, the Product Maintenance menu is displayed.
PROD MAINT 1/3 PROD MAINT 2/3 PROD MAINT 3/3

PRODUCT> LF123 PRODUCT> LF123 PRODUCT> LF123
1:Display Info 1:Delete Cross Ref 1:Mod Bin Capacity
2:Mod UPC 2:Mod Size1
3:Mod Attributes 3:Mod Size2
4:Mod Prod Class 4:Mod Size3
5:Mod Expiry 5:Mod Size4
6:Delete Product 6:Mod Size5
7. To set additional information for this product, follow the procedures in Setting or
Modifying Product Properties on page 345.
8. To exit this function, press ENTER, then [F1]. You are returned to the Warehouse
Maintenance menu.
DISPLAYING PRODUCT INFORMATION

Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to view information.
PRODUCT MAINT
Enter Product
2. Scan an existing products barcode label, or enter the product number and press ENTER.
The Product Maintenance menu is displayed.
PROD MAINT 1/3

PRODUCT> LF211
1:Display Info
2:Mod UPC
3:Mod Attributes
4:Mod Prod Class
5:Mod Expiry
6:Delete Product
3 4 3
3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 1 to select Display Info. The UPC for the
product is displayed, if one is defined.
PROD MAINT 1/3

PRODUCT> LF211
Spearmint Gum
UPC:UPC02
4. Press ENTER to view the next screen of information. The first sequential pick bin in which
the product is stored, and the products unit of measure, type, cube and product class are
displayed.
PRODUCT MAINT
PRODUCT> LF211
Spearmint Gum
Pickbin:C1
Unit:1 Type:
Cube:28.00000
Prod Class:PCLAS1
5. To view the next screen of information, press ENTER. The expiry date for the product is
displayed, if one has been defined.
6. Press ENTER to return to the Product Maintenance menu.
SETTING OR MODIFYING PRODUCT PROPERTIES

You can set a new products properties or modify those of an existing product, including:
UPC see Setting or Modifying a Products UPC on page 345.

ATT
Attributessee Enabling or Disabling Attribute Tracking for a Product on page 347.
Product class see Setting or Modifying a Products Product Class on page 349.
ATT Expiry datesee Enabling or Disabling Expiry-Date Tracking for a Product on

page 350.
Packsizes see Setting or Modifying Product Packsizes on page 358.
PUT Bin capacity (for dedicated bins only) see Setting or Modifying a Products Bin
Capacities on page 354.
SETTING OR MODIFYING A PRODUCTS UPC
> To set or modify a products UPC:
Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to modify the UPC.
PRODUCT MAINT
Enter Product
3 4 5
PROD MAINT 1/3

PRODUCT> LF211
1:Display Info
2:Mod UPC
3:Mod Attributes
4:Mod Prod Class
5:Mod Expiry
6:Delete Product
3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 2 to select Mod UPC. The current UPC for this
product is displayed (if one is defined), and you are prompted to enter a new UPC.
PRODUCT MAINT
PRODUCT> LF211
Spearmint Gum
UPC>
From: UPC02
To:
4. At the To prompt, scan the UPC for the product, or enter the new UPC and press ENTER. If
you leave the To prompt blank and press ENTER, you are prompted with *DELETE UPC*
Confirm (Y/N)?.
5. After you complete the To prompt, you are returned to the Product Maintenance menu.
ENABLING OR DISABLING ATTRIBUTE TRACKING FOR A PRODUCT
If your system is configured to track product attributes, such as lot or serial numbers, you can
ATT use the Product Maintenance function to enable or disable attribute tracking for a specific
product.
> To enable/disable attribute tracking for a product:
Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to modify the attribute
tracking setting.
PRODUCT MAINT
Enter Product
PROD MAINT 1/3

PRODUCT> LF211
1:Display Info
2:Mod UPC
3:Mod Attributes
4:Mod Prod Class
5:Mod Expiry
6:Delete Product
3 4 7
3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 3 to select Mod Attributes. The first attribute
configured for tracking is displayed, and you are prompted to enable or disable tracking of
this attribute.
Attribute.
PRODUCT MAINT 1/3
PRODUCT> LF211
SERIAL # Attribute type (unique or non-unique).
Unique - serial
Receive and Pick Functions in which this attribute is to be tracked.
From: Not Used
To: Current attribute tracking for this product (used or not used).
Use (Y/N)?
If you want to enable tracking or keep tracking enabled for this attribute, press Y and
ENTER.
If you want to disable tracking or keep tracking disabled for this attribute, press N and
ENTER.
If other attributes are configured to be tracked in your system, the next attribute is
displayed. Repeat step 4 for all remaining attributes. When you have configured tracking
for all attributes, you are returned to the Product Maintenance menu.
SETTING OR MODIFYING A PRODUCTS PRODUCT CLASS
If you want to assign a product to a product class through the handheld, you can use the
Product Maintenance function to do so. Product classes are required for RADIO BEACONs
forecasting module.
> To set or modify a products product class:
Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to modify the product
class.
PRODUCT MAINT
Enter Product
PROD MAINT 1/3

PRODUCT> LF311
1:Display Info
2:Mod UPC
3:Mod Attributes
4:Mod Prod Class
5:Mod Expiry
6:Delete Product
3 4 9
3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 4 to select Mod Prod Class. The current
product class for this product is displayed (if one is defined), and you are prompted to
enter a new product class.
PRODUCT MAINT
PRODUCT> LF311
Juicy Fruit
PRODUCT CLASS>
From: PCLAS1
To:
4. At the To prompt, enter the new product class identifier and press ENTER. If you leave the
To prompt blank and press ENTER, you are prompted with *DELETE CLASS* Confirm
(Y/N)?.
5. After you complete the To prompt, you are returned to the Product Maintenance menu.
ENABLING OR DISABLING EXPIRY-DATE TRACKING FOR A

PRODUCT
You can use the Product Maintenance function to enable or disable expiry-date tracking for a
ATT specific product. Once expiry-date tracking is enabled for a product, when a receiver receives
that product, s/he will be prompted to record its expiry date.
> To enable/disable expiry tracking for a product:
Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to modify the expiry-
date tracking setting.
PRODUCT MAINT
Enter Product
PROD MAINT 1/3

PRODUCT> LF211
1:Display Info
2:Mod UPC
3:Mod Attributes
4:Mod Prod Class
5:Mod Expiry
6:Delete Product
3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 5 to select Mod Expiry. You are prompted to
enable or disable expiry-date tracking.
PRODUCT MAINT 1/3

PRODUCT> LF211
Doublemint Gum
EXPIRY DATE>
From: N
To:
If you want to enable tracking or keep tracking enabled for expiry dates, press Y and
ENTER.
If you want to disable tracking or keep tracking disabled for expiry dates, press N and
ENTER.
If you leave the To prompt blank and press ENTER, you are prompted with *DELETE
EXPIRY* Confirm (Y/N)?. N will remove the current setting for expiry tracking; Y
will keep current the expiry setting.
You are returned to the Product Maintenance menu.
3 5 1
SETTING OR MODIFYING A PRODUCTS PACKSIZES
You can set or modify standard product packsizes using the Product Maintenance function,
described here, or the Formal Packsizes function, which accomplishes exactly the same thing.
If you do not have the appropriate permission to access the Product Maintenance function, you
can use the Formal Packsizes function; see Setting or Modifying Product Packsizes on
page 358.
The default five packsizes are Size1, Size2, Size3, Size4, and Size5, although they may be
named differently in your warehouse. For an explanation of packsizes, see Packsize of
Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS.
Note: The definition of each packsize for a product is based on the definition of a unit, size
for that product. The Size1 packsize is typically defined as 1 unit. If the products are
never sold in units of 1, then Size1 may be the smallest size in which the product is
sold; for example, packs of 10.
> To set or modify a products packsizes:
Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to modify packsizes.
PRODUCT MAINT
Enter Product
3. Press ENTER to view the second Product Maintenance screen.
PROD MAINT 2/3

PRODUCT>LF211
1:Delete Cross Ref
2:Mod size1
3:Mod size2
4:Mod size3
5:Mod size4
6:Mod size5
4. From the Product Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to the default
packsize whose quantity you wish to set or modify, from 2 to 6. The current quantity for
this packsize is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no quantity has been defined for
this packsize.)
PROD MAINT
PRODUCT>LF211
Spearmint Gum
Size2>
From:0
To:
5. At the To prompt, enter a new quantity for this packsize, and press ENTER. You are returned
to the Product Maintenance menu.
6. Repeat the procedure for each packsize you want to set for this product.
7. To exit this function, press [F1]. You are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.
3 5 3
SETTING OR MODIFYING A PRODUCTS BIN CAPACITIES
For any product, you can define a maximum quantity of the product which may be stored in
PUT dedicated bins. You can set this capacity differently for each dedicated bin in which the
product is currently stored. Once this limit is reached, warning messages will be presented to
users when they are moving or putting away product to those bins with Receiving,
Replenishment, Direct Move, or Miscellaneous Adjustment functions.
> To set or modify the bin capacity for a product:
Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to set bin capacities.
PRODUCT MAINT
Enter Product
3. Press ENTER twice to view the third Product Maintenance screen.
PROD MAINT 3/3

PRODUCT>LF211
1:Mod Bin Capacity
4. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 1 to select Mod Bin Capacity. The first
dedicated bin in which the product is currently stored is displayed, as well as the current
maximum capacity. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no maximum capacity has been defined
for this product and bin.)
PROD MAINT
PRODUCT> LF311
Juicy Fruit
A2
Capacity>
From:0
To:
5. If you want to skip setting a maximum for this bin, press ENTER; otherwise, at the To
prompt, enter the new maximum quantity for this bin, and press ENTER. The next dedicated
bin in which the product is currently stored is displayed.
6. Repeat step 6 for all dedicated bins for which you want to set the capacity for this product.
When no more bins are available, a message is displayed.
PROD MAINT 2/2

PRODUCT> LF311
Juicy Fruit
NO MORE DEDICATED
BINS FOR THIS PROD
7. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Product Maintenance menu.
3 5 5
DELETING PRODUCTS
You can use the Product Maintenance function to delete a product from RADIO BEACON WMS
only if the product does not have any stock in the warehouse, outstanding replenishments, or
outstanding receipts.
> To delete a product from RADIO BEACON WMS:
Maint. You are prompted to enter the product which you want to delete.
PRODUCT MAINT
Enter Product
PROD MAINT 1/3

PRODUCT> LF311
1:Display Info
2:Mod UPC
3:Mod Attributes
4:Mod Prod Class
5:Mod Expiry
6:Delete Product
3. From the Product Maintenance menu, press 6 to select Delete Product. You are
prompted to confirm the deletion.
PRODUCT MAINT
PRODUCT> LF311
Juicy Fruit
*DELETE PRODUCT*
CONFIRM (Y/N) ?
4. To delete the product, press Y; otherwise, press N to return to the Product Maintenance
menu.
If the product still has stock in the warehouse, outstanding replenishments, or outstanding
receipts, a message is displayed, indicating that the product cannot be deleted:
RFBASE INFO
PRODUCT> LF123
has stock in the
warehouse.
CANNOT DELETE!
Press Enter to
continue.
Press ENTER to return to the Product Maintenance menu.
If the product is successfully deleted, you are returned to the product selection prompt.
5. To delete additional products, repeat steps 2 to 4.
3 5 7
SETTING OR MODIFYING PRODUCT PACKSIZES

You can set or modify standard product packsizes using the Product Maintenance function (for
information, see Setting or Modifying a Products Packsizes on page 352), or the Formal
Packsizes function, described here, which accomplishes exactly the same thing. If you do not
have the appropriate permission to access the Product Maintenance function, you can use the
Formal Packsizes function.
In addition to setting packsizes, the Formal Packsizes function allows you to define a default
carton size to be used in receiving functions, if your warehouse receives by case.
Note: To allow a receiving default that you create here to be used in receiving, your system
must be configured to allow receiving by case. Otherwise, at receiving, a default
packsize of 1 will always be assumed, regardless of the default size you set through
the Formal Packsizes function.
> To set or change product packsizes:
1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Formal
Packsizes. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to set packsizes.
CARTON DEFAULTS
Scan Product
Product>
3. The current quantities for each of the five default packsizes for this product are displayed.
(0 indicates that no default quantity has been defined for this packsize.)
LF409
1 UNIT (1)
2 SIZ2 (25)
3 SIZ3 (0)
4 SIZ4 (0)
5 SIZ5 (0)
6 Receive Dflt
4. Press the number corresponding packsize you wish to set or change, or press 6 to create a
default packsize to be used in receiving. The current quantity for the selected packsize is
displayed, and you are prompted to enter a new packsize.
CARTON DEFAULTS
LF409
SIZ3
Current: 0
New:
5. At the New prompt, enter the quantity for your selected packsize and press ENTER. If you
are using inner and outer packsizes, you can use a forward slash to delimit an outer and
inner packsize. For example, 1/10 would indicate an outer size of 1, with an inner size of
10. The new packsize appears in the list of packsizes.
LF409
1 UNIT (1)
2 SIZ2 (25)
3 SIZ3 (100)
4 SIZ4 (0)
5 SIZ5 (0)
6 Receive Dflt
3 5 9
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each packsize you want to set, or press [F1] to exit. You are
returned to the Scan Product screen.
7. To set packsizes for additional products, repeat steps 2 to 5.
SETTING, MODIFYING, OR DELETING PRODUCT

CROSS-REFERENCES
A cross-reference is an alternate product number usually a barcode that you can use to
identify a product in RADIO BEACON WMS. Most commonly, this number will be the
suppliers product ID. If you create a cross-reference between the suppliers product number
and your warehouses product number, warehouse staff can then use either number to identify
the same product in any handheld function that prompts for a product number.
You use the Product XRef function to create a new cross-reference for a product, or modify
one currently being used, as described below. You use the Product Maintenance function to
delete an existing cross-reference, as described in Deleting a Product Cross-Reference on
page 362.
> To add a cross-reference number to a product:
XRef. The Barcode Xref screen is displayed, and you are prompted to scan the alternate
barcode for the product.
BARCODE XREF
Scan Barcode
>
2. At the Scan Barcode prompt, scan the alternate identifying barcode, or enter the alternate
product number and press ENTER. You are prompted to enter your warehouses product
number.
BARCODE XREF
Scan Barcode
>3756373
Product #
>
3. At the Product # prompt, scan your warehouses product barcode, or enter your
warehouses product number and press ENTER. You are prompted to confirm the cross-
reference you have created or updated for this product.
BARCODE XREF
Barcode
>3756373
LF312
Doublemint Gum
CONFIRM (Yes/No)
4. Press Y to use this cross-reference for your product, or press N to cancel. A message
appears confirming that the cross-reference has been updated.
BARCODE XREF
Scan Barcode
>
* UPDATED *
5. To create cross-references for additional products, repeat steps 2 to 4.
3 6 1
DELETING A PRODUCT CROSS-REFERENCE
If you have permissions to access the Product Maintenance function, you can delete a product
cross-reference.
> To delete a products cross-references:
Maint. You are prompted to enter the product for which you want to delete cross-
references.
PRODUCT MAINT
Enter Product
3. Press ENTER to view the second Product Maintenance screen.
PROD MAINT 2/3

PRODUCT>LF311
1:Delete Cross Ref
2:Mod size1
3:Mod size2
4:Mod size3
5:Mod size4
6:Mod size5
4. From the Product Maintenance menu, 1 to select Delete Cross Ref. A list of existing
cross-references is displayed.
LF311 1/1
Ref. to delete:
1:0649233
2:0224130
5. Press ENTER to view additional screens, if necessary, and press the number corresponding
to the first cross-reference you want to delete, and press ENTER. You are prompted to
confirm the deletion.
PRODUCT MAINT
PRODUCT> LF311
Juicy Fruit
Cross Reference>
0649233
* DELETE REFERENCE *
Confirm (Y/N) ?
6. Press Y to confirm the deletion, or N to cancel and return to the reference selection screen,
and press ENTER. You are returned to the first Product Maintenance screen.
7. To delete additional cross-references, repeat steps 2 to 6.
8. To exit the Product Maintenance function, press [F1].
3 6 3
SETTING OR MODIFYING REPLENISHMENT

LEVELS
REPLEN If your warehouse uses min/max advance replenishment (for information on this feature, see
Replenishment in Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS), min/max levels must be specified
for each product being replenished, for each of its standard packsizes.
If you have the appropriate permissions, you use the Replenishment Levels function to set
these levels. You can set min/max levels in two ways:
At the warehouse level. If you set the min/max levels globally, you specify a total quantity
for all pick bins (D-N-R bins) in the warehouse. When the Advance Replenishment
function is run in Web Dispatch, if the combined total quantity of this product in all pick
bins in the warehouse falls below the minimum level you specify, a replenishment request
is issued. The quantity to be replenished is determined by the total maximum quantity you
set for all bins in the warehouse.
At the bin level. If you set the min/max levels at the bin level, you specify a quantity for a
specific pick bin. When the Advance Replenishment function is run in Web Dispatch, if
the quantity of the product in this pick bin falls below the minimum level you specify, a
replenishment request is issued. The quantity to be replenished to this bin is determined by
the maximum quantity you set for this bin.
Note: If your warehouse uses sticky homes, you can set minimum/maximum replenishment
levels for products at the bin level with the Assign Pickbins function. For more
information, see Setting or Modifying Replenishment Levels for a Specific Bin on
page 377.
SETTING MINIMUM REPLENISHMENT LEVELS FOR A PRODUCT
Setting the minimum replenishment level specifies the total quantity of a product in all pick
bins, or the total quantity in a specific bin, below which a replenishment request should be
triggered when the Advance Replenishment function is run in Web Dispatch.
For each product, you can set minimum replenishment levels globally, that is, for all pick bins
in the warehouse, or for a specific bin or bins. Both options are described in the following
procedure.
Note: If the warehouse does not use sticky homes, no request will be issued for bins in
which the product is no longer stored.
> To set minimum replenishment levels for a product:
1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Replen
Levels. The Replenish Levels menu is displayed.
REPLENISH LEVELS
1-Minimum
2-Maximum
2. From the Replenish Levels menu, press 1 to select Minimum. You are prompted to enter the
product for which you want to set minimum replenishment levels.
REPLENISH LEVELS
Scan Product
Product>
3 6 5
If default packsizes 2, 3, 4, or 5 are defined for this product, the minimum replenishment
level for each packsize is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no minimum
replenishment level has been set for this packsize.)
LF409
1 UNIT (0)
2 SIZ2 (0)
3 SIZ3 (0)
4. Press the number corresponding to the packsize for which you want to set the minimum
level. The current minimum level is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no minimum
REPLENISH LEVELS
LF409
Minimum: 0
Minimum>

To set the total minimum replenishment To set the minimum replenishment level
level for this product for all pick bins in this product for a single pick bin, press
the warehouse, at the Minimum prompt, [F8]. You are prompted to enter the bin for
enter the new minimum replenishment which you want to set the minimum level.
level for this packsize and press ENTER.
You are returned to the Scan Product REPLENISH LEVELS
screen. Repeat the procedure for LF409
additional products, or press [F1] to exit Life Savers PepOMint
Min Quantity
the function and return to the Warehouse Set For:
Maintenance menu. Bin:
6. Scan the barcode label of the bin you want to specify, or enter the bin number and press
ENTER. The current minimum level for the bin is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that
no minimum replenishment level has been set for this bin.)
REPLENISH LEVELS
LF409
Bin: A4
Min: 0
New Min:
(Default:0)
7. At the New Min prompt, enter the new minimum for this bin for this product, and press
ENTER. You are prompted to confirm the new minimum.
REPLENISH LEVELS
LF409
Bin: A4
Min: 600
Confirm (Y/N)
3 6 7
8. Press Y to confirm the new setting, or N to cancel. You are returned to the Scan Product
screen.
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 to set minimums for all other standard packsizes of this product.
10. To set minimums for additional bins for this product, or for other products, repeat steps 3
to 8.
SETTING MAXIMUM REPLENISHMENT LEVELS FOR A PRODUCT
Setting the maximum replenishment level specifies the total quantity of a product to be
replenished to all pick bins, or to a specific bin or bins. When the Advance Replenishment
function is run in Web Dispatch, and the replenishment request is issued, the quantity of
requested stock is the remaining quantity needed to satisfy the maximum replenishment level
you have defined for all bins in the warehouse, or for each specific bin.
> To set maximum replenishment levels:
1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Replen
Levels. The Replenish Levels menu is displayed.
REPLENISH LEVELS
1-Minimum
2-Maximum
2. From the Replenish Levels menu, press 2 to select Maximum. You are prompted to enter the
product for which you want to set maximum replenishment levels.
REPLENISH LEVELS
Scan Product
Product>
If default packsizes 2, 3, 4, or 5 are defined for this product, the maximum replenishment
level for each packsize is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no maximum
LF409
1 UNIT (0)
2 SIZ2 (0)
3 SIZ3 (0)
3 6 9
4. Press the number corresponding to the packsize for which you want to set the maximum
level. The current maximum level is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that no
maximum replenishment level has been set for this packsize.)
REPLENISH LEVELS
LF409
Maximum: 0
Maximum>
To set the total maximum replenishment To set the maximum replenishment level
level for the product for all pick bins in the for the product for a single pick bin, press
warehouse, at the Maximum prompt, enter [F8]. You are prompted to enter the bin for
the new maximum replenishment level for which you want to set the maximum level.
this packsize and press ENTER. You are
returned to the Scan Product screen. REPLENISH LEVELS
Repeat the procedure for additional LF409
products, or press [F1] to exit the function Life Savers PepOMint
Max Quantity
and return to the Warehouse Maintenance Set For:
menu. Bin:
Continue by following step 6.
6. Scan the barcode label of the bin you want to specify, or enter the bin number and press
ENTER. The current maximum level for the bin is displayed. (A quantity of 0 indicates that
no maximum replenishment level has been set for this bin.)
REPLENISH LEVELS
LF409
Bin: A4
Max: 0
New Max:
(Default:0)
7. At the New Max prompt, enter the new maximum for this bin for this product, and press
ENTER. You are prompted to confirm the new maximum.
REPLENISH LEVELS
LF409
Bin: A4
Max: 2000
Confirm (Y/N)
8. Press Y to confirm the new setting, or N to cancel. You are returned to the Scan Product
screen.
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 to set maximums for all other standard packsizes of this product.
10. To set maximums for additional bins for this product, or for other products, repeat steps 3
to 8.
3 7 1
SETTING OR MODIFYING STICKY HOMES

If your warehouse is configured to use sticky homes (for an explanation, see Home in
Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS), you can define which products should be associated
with which bins. To do so, you use the Assign Pickbins function, which gives you the
following options:
Add a new product-bin assignment. You can associate a new product at a specific packsize
with a bin, or assign an existing product to a new bin. See the procedure in Assigning a
Product to a Bin on page 372.
Delete a product-bin assignment from the system. If a bin is no longer used for a product
that has been assigned to it, you can unassign the product from bin, and make the bin
available for other products. See the procedure in Unassigning a Product from a Bin on
page 374.
REPLEN Set or modify minimum and maximum advance replenishment levels for a product for a
specific bin.See the procedure in Setting or Modifying Replenishment Levels for a
Specific Bin on page 377.
ASSIGNING A PRODUCT TO A BIN
This procedure creates an entirely new bin assignment for a product, or reassigns a product
from an old bin to a new one.
> To assign or reassign a product to a bin:
1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number corresponding to Assign
Pickbins. The Assign Pickbins screen is displayed, and you are prompted to enter the
product you want to assign.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
Scan Product
Product>
You are prompted to enter the packsize which you want to assign to the bin.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522
Big Red
Packsize:
3. Enter the packsize and press ENTER. If the product already exists in another bin, its current
location is displayed.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522
Big Red
From:C3
To:
4. Scan the barcode label of the new bin to which you want to assign your product, or at the
To: prompt, enter the bin number and press ENTER.
If the new bin you have selected is a dedicated or random bin containing other product(s),
or a non-dedicated bin containing this product in a different packsize, or if the bin is not a
stick bin, an error message is displayed. Press ENTER to continue and return to the first
Assign Pickbins screen, and begin the procedure again.
If you enter a bin that does not exist, and you are prompted to add the bin, press Y to add
3 7 3
If your product is already assigned to another bin, you are prompted to confirm that you
want to re-assign your product to this new bin.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
That product
is already in
bin: C1
Re-assign stock
to: A1
(Y/N)?
5. Press Y to assign your product to this new bin, or press N to cancel. If you press N, and the
product already exists in another bin, a message is displayed; press ENTER to return to the
Scan Product screen.
6. To assign additional products to sticky bins, repeat steps 2 to 5.
7. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.
UNASSIGNING A PRODUCT FROM A BIN
If you want to free up a bin to make it available for other product assignments, you can delete
the bins existing assignment.
Note: If there is any inventory of the product in the bin you want to unassign, you cannot
delete the bin assignment. You must first remove all remaining quantities of the
product from the bin.
> To unassign a product from a bin:
1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number that corresponds to Assign
product you want to unassign.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
Scan Product
Product>
You are prompted to enter the packsize you want to unassign from the bin.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522
Big Red
Packsize:
3. Enter the packsize and press ENTER. The first sequential pick bin with product in this
packsize is displayed.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522
Big Red
From:C1
To:
3 7 5
4. Press [F9] to delete the bin assignment. You are prompted to confirm the bin from which
you want to delete the product assignment.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522
Packsize: 25
Delete From: C1
Bin:
5. Scan the bins barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. If the bin
assignment you want to delete still contains product, the message Not Empty appears.
Press [F1] to return to the Scan Product screen and begin again.
You are prompted to confirm the bin assignment deletion.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522
Big Red
Packsize : 25
From: C1
DELETE PICKBIN!!
Confirm (Y/N)?!
6. Press Y to confirm the deletion, or N to cancel. You are returned to the Scan Product
screen.
7. To exit this function, press ENTER and you are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance
menu.
SETTING OR MODIFYING REPLENISHMENT LEVELS FOR A SPECIFIC

BIN
You can set maximum/minimum replenishment levels for a product at the bin level with the
REPLEN Assign Pickbins function. For more information on replenishment levels, see Setting or
Modifying Replenishment Levels on page 364.
Before you can use the Assign Pickbins function to set replenishment levels for a product
for a specific bin, you must have already assigned the product to a bin. To do so, follow the
procedure in Assigning a Product to a Bin on page 372.
> To set maximum/minimum replenishment levels for a bin assignment:
1. From the Warehouse Maintenance menu, press the number that corresponds to Assign
product for which you want to set min/max replenishment levels for a specific bin.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
Scan Product
Product>
3 7 7
You are prompted to enter the packsize for which you want to set min/max levels.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522
Big Red
Packsize:
3. Enter the desired packsize and press ENTER. The first sequential pick bin with product in
this packsize is displayed.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522
Big Red
From:C3
To:
4. Press [F8] to set min/max replenishment levels for this product. You are prompted to
confirm the bin for which you want to set the min/max levels.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522 1
Big Red
Min/Max Quantity:
Set For:C3
Bin:
5. Scan the bins barcode label, or enter the bin number and press ENTER. The current
minimum/maximum values for this product in this bin are displayed (0 indicates that this
is a new replenishment level setting). You are prompted to enter a new minimum level.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522 1
Big Red
Bin: C1
Min: 0
Max: 0
New Min:
(Default: 0)
6. At the New Min prompt, enter the new minimum replenishment level for this product in
this bin, and press ENTER. Your new minimum value is displayed, and you are prompted to
enter a new maximum level.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522 1
Big Red
Bin: C1
Min: 200
Max: 0
New Max:
(Default: 0)
7. At the New Max prompt, enter the new maximum replenishment level for this product in
this bin, and press ENTER. Your new maximum value is displayed, and you are prompted to
confirm the new replenishment levels.
ASSIGN PICKBINS
LF522 1
Big Red
Bin: C1
Min: 200
Max: 1000
Confirm (Y/N)
3 7 9
8. Press Y to confirm the new replenishment levels, or N to cancel. You are returned to the
first Scan Product screen.
9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 to set replenishment levels for additional packsizes of this product.
10. To define replenishment levels for additional products, repeat steps 2 to 8.
11. To exit this function, press ENTER. You are returned to the Warehouse Maintenance menu.
13 USING LICENSE PLATES
UNDERSTANDING LICENSE PLATES

A license plate is a unique number, 9-20 characters in length, which is associated with specific
products in a specific bin. License plates provide an effective way of grouping together
products, and identifying and tracking those products in the warehouse.
License plates are created in RADIO BEACON WMS with any process that adds stock into a bin,
such as receiving, adjustments into the warehouse, and moves within the warehouse from one
bin into another bin. Once the license plate is created, you can add and remove products from
the license plate, move and assign the license plate to a different bin, pick the license plate to
fulfill a sales order, etc. Many warehousing functions can be performed as usual by the user,
while the license plate information is preserved by RADIO BEACON WMS without the need for
manual intervention.
A license plate can only be associated with one single bin at a time. The items in the license
plate cannot be dispersed in more than one bin. A license plate can be moved from one bin to
another, essentially reassigning the license plate to the new bin.
When you create a new license plate in the warehouse, typically you will scan a carton label or
track-trace number and use that as the license plate. Alternately, when creating a new license
plate, you can use the License Plate Print function to print a label for the next sequential
licence plate number. See Printing License Plates on page 287.
3 8 1
LICENSE PLATE BINS
Any bin in the warehouse that contains license plates must be configured to preserve the
license plate information. By default, warehouse bins kill license plates. This means that
license plated products that are moved to bins that are not configured for license plates will
lose their license plate information, and the products will exist loose in the bin.
LICENSE PLATE CONSTRAINTS
The following license plate constraint must be observed at all times:
A bin may not hold a product & packsize in both license plate and free (non-license
plate) formats at the same time.
This means that if you have a license-plated product & packsize in a bin, then all of that same
product & packsize in that bin must be license plated. You cannot have product in licence
plates and at the same time have that product in the same size lying around loose in the bin.
This prevents warehouse staff from making mistakes when adding or removing stock from a
bin, and also helps to keep your warehouse organized.
ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT MIXING
The license plate constraint does not prevent you from mixing products as follows:
You can store license-plated products along with different non license-plated stock in the
same bin. For example, bin A01 could hold product A in license plates along with product
B loose. Although you are allowed to mix loose product and license plates in this way, as
a best practice, you may want to avoid it.
You can mix multiple types of license plates in the same bin. For example, pallets of
product A and pallets of product B could be mixed in a bin.
Obviously, products should be clearly marked for the pickers when mixing is allowed.
3 8 2 CHAP TER 13 U S I NG L I C E NS E P L A T E S
CREATING LICENSE PLATES

License plates can be created during the following warehouse operations:
During receiving
Receiving items into the warehouse (regular PO receiving, random receiving, regular
container receiving and RMAs) When you putaway products in temporary or
permanent bins, you can create new license plates. Described in Putting Away
Quick Container receivingThis is an effective way of license plating all the

products in a container or purchase order at one time. When you quick receive the
container, you can create a new license plate to hold the entire contents of the
container. Described in Quick Container Receiving on page 55.
ASN receiving You can check-in the entire carton simply by scanning the track-
trace number on the cartons label. All items in the carton are added to the bin you
specify and the track-trace number is captured as the license plate. Described in
Receiving By ASN Label on page 60.
Adjustments into the warehouseWhen you putaway the products that you adjust in, you
can create new license plates. Described in Adjusting Product Into the Warehouse on
page 331.
3 8 3
ADDING PRODUCTS TO LICENSE PLATES

Once the license plate is created, you can add products to the license plate during the following
warehouse operations:
During receiving
Receiving items into the warehouse (regular PO receiving, random receiving, regular
container receiving and RMAs)When you putaway products in temporary or
permanent bins, you can add the products to existing license plates. Described in
Putting Away Products on page 48
Quick Container receivingWhen you quick receive the container, you can add the
entire contents of the container to an existing license plate. Described in Quick
Container Receiving on page 55.
Adjustments into the warehouseWhen you putaway the products that you adjust in, you
can add the products to existing license plates. Described in Adjusting Product Into the
Warehouse on page 331
REMOVING PRODUCTS FROM LICENSE PLATES

You can move products out of a license plate using the handheld Direct Move and Adjustment
functions, as follows:
Direct Move-OutThis function can be used to remove a product (s) from a license plate
and move the product(s) to a different bin location in the warehouse, for example to pick
bins. When you move the last item out of the license plate, the license plate is removed
from RADIO BEACON WMS altogether. Depending on your configuration, you may be
required to confirm license plate removal when the last item is removed. Described in
Moving Inventory on page 69.
Adjustments-OutThis function can be used to remove products from a license plate and
from inventory. For example, you may need to remove damaged goods from a license
plate, but they also need to removed from the stock in the warehouse, since they are no
longer saleable. Described in Adjustments to License Plates on page 327.
License Plate Adjust-Out This function removes all items in the license plate at one
time and removes the license plate from RADIO BEACON WMS altogether. Described in
Adjusting License Plates Out on page 337.
Note: When all the items are removed from a license plate, the license plate no longer exists
in RADIO BEACON WMS and the license plate number can be reused.
DELETING LICENSE PLATES

Deleting a license plate lets you reuse the license plate number. License plates can be deleted
as follows:
Direct Move-OutThis function can be used to remove all product (s) one product at a
time, from a license plate and to a different bin location in the warehouse. When you
move the last item out of the license plate, the license plate is removed from RADIO
BEACON WMS altogether. Depending on your configuration, you may required to confirm
license plate removal when the last item is removed. Described in Moving Inventory on
page 69.
License Plate Adjust-OutThis function removes all items in the license plate at one time
and removes the license plate from RADIO BEACON WMS altogether. Described in
Adjusting License Plates Out on page 337.
MOVING LICENSE PLATES

Moving license plates within the warehouse is described in Moving Inventory on page 69.
3 8 5
PICKING AN ORDER USING LICENSE PLATES

Ensure that you understand the picking process in RADIO BEACON WMS as described in
Chapter 6, Picking and Packing Orders on page 173 before reading this section.
License plate picking is simplified and extremely effective scan the license plate and then
scan the shipping labelquantity, lots, serials, etc. are already known.
If the pick is not intended for a license plate, then regular picking is used. License plate and
non-license plate picking can be freely mixed in an order.
RADIO BEACON WMS supports two kinds of license plate picking:
The host system wants a specific license plate to be pickedThe desired license plate
number is downloaded from the host with the order, and restricts RADIO BEACON WMS to
only select that license plate during allocation and picking. For successful allocation, the
order has to match the contents of the license plate exactly. RADIO BEACON WMS will
hold the order in HELD FORMAT if there is any mismatch between the requirements and
the contents of the license plate.
When the picker is prompted for the first product, they go to the bin and scan or enter the
license plate. If the picker selects a different license plate than that requested, even if the
contents of both license plates are the same, the picker will receive a message that it is the
wrong license plate.
RADIO BEACON WMS allocates orders using license-plated stockThe picker is instructed
to find the first product, and may scan any license plate that contains one of these
products. RADIO BEACON WMS processes the details as a single pick. The bin must be
configured for uniform license plates, which means that all license plates in a bin
containing a product have the same mix of quantities-product-packsizes. This ensures that
the picker can select any license plate (since all the license plates are the same).
For each pick, RADIO BEACON WMS validates that the license plate contains what is expected
and if the pick is for a specific license plate, that the license plate is the one indicated in the
order. Using license plate picking there is no query for quantity, or for serial/ lot numbers or
other attributes, since this is all known.
INDEX
A B
adding barcode 360
barcodes 360 deleting 362
bin assignments 372 scanning 6
cross-references 360 scanning additional 259
new license plates 48, 50, 58, 60, 327, 332, batch picking 177, 196
383 BATCHPCK location 196, 221, 222
product 339, 340 bin
48, 50,
products to an existing license plate assigning products to 372
58, 66, 327, 332, 383, 384 finding empty 110
purchase orders to wave 19 looking up contents 65
sales orders to wave 183 printing overstock labels for products 284
adding bins 50, 58, 61 querying 110
adjusting removing product assignments 374
license plates out 337 searching 110
products in 331 setting or modifying capacity 354
products out 334 bin capacity, setting or modifying 354
adjustment bin label, printing 272
creating 328 Bin Lookup 65, 117
types of 325 box size, changing 222
advance replenishment
min/max 364
setting min/max levels for 364, 377 C
ASN receiving 60 cancelling an action 14
ASN SSCC-18 label, reprinting 288 capacity, setting for bins 354
attribute CART location 107
handling product 12
identifying products with 10
setting tracking for a product 347
3 8 7
carton container
adding to pallets 261 quick receiving 55
changing box size 222 receiving 16
combining 232 restarting receipt 31
processing shipping 239 stopping receipt 31
recording details 252 wave 23
recording shipment information 250 contents label, printing 293
relabelling 233, 234 counting
repacking 226 by bin 301, 302
re-rating shipping 248 by date 302
restarting repacking 228 by product 302
scanning shipping 239 cycle 299
stopping repacking 228 entire inventory 299
weighing shipping 239 creating
carton contents label, printing 293 cross-references 360
carton picking 180 kit 167
Carton Shipping 239 license plates 48, 50, 58, 60, 327, 332, 383
carton summary label, printing 295 miscellaneous adjustments 328
case picking 180 product 340
changing products 339
barcodes 360 replenishment requests 119
box size 222 sales orders 211
cross-references 360 transfer purchase orders 62
min/max levels 364 wave of sales orders 185
packsizes 358 cross-reference
replenishment levels 364 deleting 362
closing purchase orders 54 setting 360
codes Crystal Reports packslip, reprinting 241, 291
miscellaneous adjustment 325 cycle counting 299
receiving 41 by bin 301, 302
combining cartons 232 by date 302, 304
completing by each 313, 317
cycle count 320 by product 302, 306
kits 160 by quantity 313, 314
packaging 160 completing 320
purchase orders 54 restarting 323
consolidation, stock 53, 80, 95, 144, 331 stopping 322
3 8 8
D F
default values, accepting 9 F1 key 14
deleting Fill Bins 141
bin assignments 374 finding
product 356 empty bins 113
product cross-reference 362 homes for products 110
details Finish Kits 160
recording carton 252 finishing
recording shipment 251 kit 160
Direct Move 69 packaging 160
for replenishment 118 Formal Packsizes function 358
two-step 70 full count 299
Direct Move In 80 full-case picking 180
license plate 88 function keys 8
multiple products 85
single product 81
Direct Move Out 71 G
license plate 78 group, letting down stock for 124
multiple products 76
single product 72, 78
Direct Move, one-step 91 H
directed putaway 110 homes
disassembling kits 169 finding for products 110
displaying product info 343 single 53, 80, 95, 144, 331
sticky 53, 80, 95, 144, 331
E
editing packsizes 358 I
empty bin, finding 110, 113 identifying products 10
entering sales orders 211 info, getting product 343
entering work orders 167 interrupting
errors, shipping 245 cycle count 322
exiting 14 picking wave 189
expiry date, setting tracking for a product 350 PO receipt 29
external process, marking complete 264 purchase order receipt 27
wave of purchase orders 27
3 8 9
inventory entering 167

adjusting in 331 finishing 160
adjusting out 334 letting down stock 139
completing count of 320 pulling 153
counting all 299 reversing 169
counting by bin 301, 302
counting by date 302, 304
counting by each 313, 317 L
counting by product 302, 306 label
counting by quantity 313, 314 ASN SSCC-18 288
cycle counting 299 bin 272
letting down 123 carton contents 293
letting down by group 124 carton summary 295
letting down by kit 139 contents 293
letting down by pick zone 135 license plates
letting down by product 132 license plates
letting down by quantity 128
printing 287
moving 69
overstock 280
moving in license plate 88
picking/shipping 289
moving in multiple products 85
product/UPC 276
moving in single product 81
relabelling a carton 233, 234
moving out 71
SCC-14 285
moving out license plates 78
SSCC-18 289
moving out multiple products 76, 78 Letdown Stock 123
moving out single product 72
by group 124
recounting all 308, 311
by kit 139
restarting cycle count 323
by pick zone 135
stopping cycle count 322
by product 132
unreserving 105
by quantity 128
letdown ticket 117
letting down stock 123
K by group 124
keys, function 8 by kit 139
kit by pick zone 135
building 153 by product 132
completing 160 by quantity 128
creating 167
disassembling 169
3 9 0
license plates receiving 17

adding new license plates 48, 50, 58, 60, types of 325
327, 332, 383, 384 modifying
adding products to an existing license plate 48, barcodes 360
50, 58, 66, 327, 332, 383, 384 cross-references 360
adjusting out 337 min/max levels 364
creating 48, 50, 58, 60, 327, 332, 383 packsizes 358
moving 78, 88, 99 product cross-reference 360
moving in 88 replenishment levels 364
moving out 78 moving
removing products 66, 384 inventory 69
logging on 1 license plate in 88
logical printer 268 license plates 78, 88, 99
logon 1 multiple products in 85
looking up bins 65 multiple products in one step 96
multiple products out 76, 78
products 69
M products in 80
Mark as Repacked 223 products out 71
Mark External 264 serialized products 115
marking an external process complete 264 single product in 81
maximum product levels, setting 368 single product in one step 91
menu single product out 72, 78
Overstock 119
Print Labels 270
Repack 223 N
Shipping 240 N/M label, printing 294
Warehouse Maintenance 340 new carton label 233, 234
Work Orders 153 non-PO receiving 17
messages, shipping 242 numbered carton contents label, printing 294
min/max advance replenishment 364
min/max levels
setting 364 O
setting for sticky homes 377 one-scan picking 180, 205
minimum product levels, setting 365 one-step
miscellaneous adjustment Direct Move 91
creating 328 Pallet Move 96
products in 331 opening miscellaneous adjustments 328
products out 334
3 9 1
order shorting partial quantity 208

creating 211 skipping 206, 207
creating wave 185 pick-and-pass picking 178
picking wave 193 picking
printing overstock labels for 282 by batch 177, 196
printing product labels 279 by case 180
repacking 223 by order 179
starting wave 183 by product 177, 199
order picking 179 by scanning each unit 178
overstock label by wave 193
printing 280 by zone 179
printing by bin 284 in reverse 179
printing by product 281 interrupting 189
printing for entire sales order 282 one-scan 180, 205
Overstock menu 119 pick-and-pass 178
regular 193
restarting 188
P scanner 178
packaging 153 sequential zone 179
completing 160 shortcut 180
packsize, setting or modifying 358 simultaneous zone 179
packslip stopping 188
reprinting 241, 291 unpick 209
packslip, reprinting Crystal 291 picking modes 175, 192
pallet label, printing 261 picking styles 175
Pallet Move In 85 picking/shipping label
Pallet Move Out 76, 78 reprinting 289
Pallet Move, one-step 96 PO receiving 16
pallet, adding cartons to 261 Print Labels menu 270
paper packslip, reprinting 241, 291 Print Redirect 268, 270
physical printers 268 printers
pick assignments 268
shorting 206, 207 logical 268
shorting entire line 209 physical 268
3 9 2
printing cycle counting 299

bin labels 272 deleting 356
carton contents labels 293 deleting cross-reference 362
carton summary labels 295 finding homes for 110
contents label 293 getting info 343
license plates 287 handling attributes 12
N/M labels 294 identifying 10
numbered carton contents labels 294 letting down 123
overstock labels 280 letting down by group 124
overstock labels by bin 284 letting down by kit 139
overstock labels by product 281 letting down by pick zone 135
overstock labels for entire sales order 282 letting down by product 132
pallet labels 261 letting down by quantity 128
product labels by product 277 modifying UPC 345
product/UPC labels 276 moving 69
product/UPC labels for entire sales order 279 moving in, multiple 85
reprinting packslip 241 moving in, single 81
SCC-14 285 moving multiple in one step 96
summary labels 295 moving out 71
processing shipments 239 moving single in one step 91
product putting away 33, 48
adding 339, 340 recounting all 308, 311
adjusting in 331 repacking 230
adjusting out 334 restarting cycle count 323
assigning to bins 372 restocking 107
attributes 10 setting attribute tracking 347
completing count of 320 setting expiry-date tracking 350
counting all 299 setting or modifying packsizes 358
counting by bin 301, 302 setting or modifying properties 345
counting by date 302, 304 setting product class 349
counting by each 313, 317 stopping cycle count 322
counting by product 302, 306 unreserving 105
counting by quantity 313, 314 product class, setting for a product 349
cross-references 360
3 9 3
Product Maintenance
adding new product 340
Q
querying bins 110
adding products 339
deleting product 356
quick container receiving 55
quitting 14
deleting product cross-reference 362
deleting products 356
displaying product info 343
modifying packsizes 358
R
modifying product properties 345 Radio Beacon
setting attribute tracking 347 contact info xv
setting bin capacity 354 Web site xv
setting expiry-date tracking 350 random receiving 36
setting product class 349 reassigning printers 268
setting UPC 345 receiving
product picking 177, 199 additional prompts 17
product returns, putaway 107 by ASN label 60
Product XRef 360 by miscellaneous adjustment 17
product/UPC label by product 36
printing 276, 277 by purchase order 16
printing for entire sales order 279 by RMA 16, 24
Pull Kitting 153 codes 41
pulling kits 153 container 16
purchase order non-PO 17
closing 54 purchase order 16
completing 54 quick container 55
receiving 16 random 36
restarting receipt of 29 restarting wave 29
stopping receipt of 29 starting purchase order wave 19
putaway 33, 48 stopping wave 29
directed 110 wave 18
returned products 107 without purchase order 17
putting away Record Shipment 250
products 33, 48 Recount 308, 311
returned products 107 recounting entire inventory 308, 311
redirecting printers 268
relabelling a carton 233, 234
removing products from a license plate 66, 384
Repack menu 223
Repack station 2
3 9 4
repackaging 153 restarting

repacking container receiving 31
combining cartons 232 cycle count 323
entire order 223 picking 188
restarting 228 PO receipt 29
single carton 226 repacking 228
single item 230 wave of purchase orders 27
stopping 228 wave of sales orders 188
REPLENIS location 141 Restock 107
Replenish Levels 364 restocking inventory 107
setting maximum 368 returns 107
setting minimum 365 reverse kitting 169
replenishment reverse picking 179
by bulk location 124 RMA receiving 16, 24
by Direct Move 118
by kit 139
by product 132 S
by zone 135 sales order
filling bins 141 creating 211
groups 124 creating wave 185
one-step 118 picking wave 193
two-step 118 printing overstock labels for 282
replenishment group, letting down stock 124 printing product labels for 279
replenishment levels repacking 223
setting 364 restarting wave 188
setting for sticky homes 377 starting wave 183
setting maximum 368 stopping wave 188, 189
setting minimum 365 sales order by walking 211
Replenishment Report 117 scanner picking 178
replenishment request, creating 119 scanning
reprinting barcodes 6
ASN SSCC-18 labels 288 shipments 239
Crystal packslip 291 shipping cartons 239
packslip 241 SCC-14 label, printing 285
picking/shipping labels 289 searching
SSCC-18 label 289 bins 110
empty bins 113
sequential zone picking 179
3 9 5
setting shorting
maximum product levels 368 entire line 209
min/max levels 364 partial quantity 208
min/max product levels for sticky homes 377 picks 206, 207
minimum product levels 365 simultaneous zone picking 179
packsizes 358 single homes 53, 80, 95, 144, 331
product cross-reference 360 skipping picks 206, 207
replenishment levels 364 SOBWA 211
shipment SSCC-18 label, reprinting 289
adding to pallets 261 staged order 239
marking external process complete 264 starting
processing 239 container wave 23
recording information 250 wave of purchase orders 19
re-rating 248 wave of sales orders 180
scanning barcodes 259 sticky homes 53, 80, 95, 144, 331
weighing 239 adding 372
shipment details, recording 251 deleting 374
shipping setting min/max levels 377
errors 245 stock
marking external process complete 264 adjusting in 331
messages 242 adjusting out 334
scanning barcodes 259 completing count of 320
staged order 239 counting all 299
shipping carton counting by bin 301, 302
adding to pallets 261 counting by date 302, 304
recording details 252 counting by each 313, 317
recording information 250 counting by product 302, 306
re-rating 248 counting by quantity 313, 314
scanning 239 cycle counting 299
weighing 239 letting down 123
shipping label letting down by group 124
reprinting 289 letting down by kit 139
Shipping menu 240 letting down by pick zone 135
short products, handling 206 letting down by product 132
shortcut picking 180
3 9 6
letting down by quantity 128 U

moving 69
unpicking 209
moving in license plate 88
unreserving inventory 105
moving in multiple products 85
UPC, setting for a product 345
moving in single product 81
updating
moving out 71
barcodes 360
recounting all 308, 311
cross-references 360
restarting cycle count 323
packsizes 358
stopping cycle count 322
replenishment levels 364
unreserving 105
Stock Count 299
first count 308, 309
recount 308, 311
V
stopping viewing product info 343
any function 14
container receiving 31
cycle count 322 W
picking 188, 189 Warehouse Maintenance menu 340
PO receipt 29 wave
repacking 228 adding sales orders 183
wave of purchase orders 27 container 23
wave of sales orders 188, 189 creating 185
summary label, printing 295 picking 193
system locations purchase orders 19
BATCHPCK 196, 221, 222 receiving 18
REPLENIS 141 receiving, starting 19
TRANSIT 70 restarting receiving 29
restarting sales order 188
starting container 23
T starting purchase order 19
Total Support Web site xv starting sales orders 180
transfer purchase orders 62 stopping receiving 29
TRANSIT location 70 stopping sales order 188, 189
two-step Direct Move 70
3 9 7
waving sales orders 185 Z

Web site, Total Support xv
zone picking 179
Web Workstation 2
defined 179
weighing shipping cartons 239
sequential, defined 179
work orders
See kit simultaneous, defined 179
Work Orders menu 153 zone, selecting for picking 181
3 9 8

Accellos - Guide - Handheld - Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Accellos - Guide - Handheld - Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Accellos One Warehouse

Powered by RADIO BEACON

Copyright Accellos, Inc.

ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

Finding Homes for Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Starting a Wave of Sales Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Setting or Modifying Product Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

ABOUT OPTIONAL SOFTWARE MODULES

Web Order Entry

Integrated Shipping/End-of-Line Settings

Returned Materials Authorizations

Vendor Portal and Cross Docking

Because every warehouse implementation is different, it is impossible to document all possible

GETTING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND

Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS

Using RADIO BEACON Web Dispatch

TOTAL SUPPORT WEB SITE

CONTACTING RADIO BEACON

Radio Beacon Support

Telephone: 1-(800) 247-9526 Ext. 2

Fax: (416) 486-2169

1 USING THE HANDHELD

Starting RADIO BEACON WMS on page 2.

Navigating Menus on page 5.

Scanning Barcodes on page 6.

Selecting Options from Lists on page 7.

Using Function Keys on page 8.

Accepting Default Values on page 9.

Identifying Products on page 10.

Handling Products with Attributes on page 12.

Canceling Actions on page 14.

Exiting RADIO BEACON on page 14.

STARTING RADIO BEACON WMS

To log on to RADIO BEACON:

1. Do one of the following:

Enter the following in the

Where <computer> is the

The RADIO BEACON WMS logon screen is displayed.

You may select one of the alternate Web

User ID: TOM

The number of this

From a sub-menu, the navigation function keys are as follows:

SELECTING OPTIONS FROM LISTS

To select these items, you can do any of the following:

Press the number to the left of the item.

USING FUNCTION KEYS

USING FUNCTION KEYS ON THE WEB WORKSTATION

Example 1: Normal display on the Web Workstation:

Example 2: Symbol M90 display on the Web Workstation

ACCEPTING DEFAULT VALUES

LF409 If this value is correct, simply

the warehouse product number

the vendor part number

the UPC number

the SSCC-14 number

the client number/name

the lot number

3PL If your warehouse is a 3PL/multi-company operation, to show a list of client names/

To page up, press [F2].

To shift to the right, press [F9].

HANDLING PRODUCTS WITH ATTRIBUTES

EXITING RADIO BEACON